HomeMy WebLinkAboutOlin Hall - Chemical
self pricing Olin 201/00 00 01 - TABLE OF CONTENTS.docx
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 05 - METALS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 07 92 00 – JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09 01 90.52 – MAINTENANCE REPAINTING
SECTION 09 22 16 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
SECTION 09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD
SECTION 09 91 00 – INTERIOR PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 23.12BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 23.14CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 15 13General-Service Compressed-Air Piping
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
SECTION 23 05 93TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 31 13METAL DUCTS
SECTION 23 33 00AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 05 19LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
SECTION 26 05 26GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 29HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 33RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 05 53IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 27 26WIRING DEVICES
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
NOT APPLICABLE
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Table of Contents <TOC - 2
self pricing Olin 201/01_Self-Pricing_Invitation to Bid_Olin 201.docx
INVITATION TO BID
FACILITY:Olin Hall, FC 2024
PROJECT:11750 - Olin Mobilizing Construction Mass Spec Relocation
DATE:April 27, 2021
☐ </wSTATE OWNED (Prevailing Wage Required) (Request schedule from Facilities Contracts)
☒ </wUNIVERSITY OWNED (BTC Agreement Applies)
Scope of Work
The scope of work includes the following:
Provide necessary infrastructure improvements to facilitate a mass spec operation within Olin 201. The work includes mechanical upgrades and balancing, electrical demolition and install,
plumbing valve install, and MEP affected finish work such as patch and paint, reinstallation of ceiling and equipment.
All services shall be performed in accordance with the terms and conditions outlined in Cornell University’s Short Form Contract, a copy of which is attached.
Schedule
RFI Due Date05/05/2021
Final Addendum Issue Date05/06/2021
Bid Due Date05/12/2021
Contract Award05/19/2021
Project Start05/31/2021
Project Completion06/16/2021
Requests for Information
Questions about the project shall be submitted to:
Technical
Lisa N. Parish
mailto:lisa@chiangobrien.comlisa@chiangobrien.com
Caterina McFadden
mailto:cm895@cornell.educm895@cornell.edu
Contractual
Facilities Contracts,
mailto:FacilitiesContracts@cornell.eduFacilitiesContracts@cornell.edu
Submission Requirements
Proposals shall be submitted to Caterina McFadden, cm895@cornell.edu, electronically via a “Reply” response to the invitation email, with a copy to
mailto:FacilitiesContracts@cornell.eduFacilitiesContracts@cornell.edu, no later than 2:00 PM on May 12, 2021. <No hard copies will be required.
Attachments:
Cornell University Master Form of Agreement – Short Form Contract. Actual agreement will reflect scope of services outlined in this Invitation to Bid.
Bid Form
Asbestos Survey Report
Architectural Specifications
Architectural Drawings
Caterina McFadden, Project Manager
Facilities and Campus Services
Humphreys Service Building
Ithaca, New York 14853-3701
Last Revision: February 2017Page 2
self pricing Olin 201/02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION.pdf 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing
construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction,
in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. 1. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.
2. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit
report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate
proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's other tenants'
on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation
of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list
of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous
materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be
removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to
remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with
governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with
ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review
record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions
and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with
intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions:
Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated
to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility
services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of
services/systems to other parts of building. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression
systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining
piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be
Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate,
reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be
Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with
same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference
with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied
portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3.4 SELECTIVE
DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering
and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 5. Locate selective
demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated
to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition
and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Resilient Floor
Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods
requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished
materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building
by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials
off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return
adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 41 19 - 6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
self pricing Olin 201/02_Self-Pricing_Bid Form_Olin 201.doc OLIN MOBILIZING CONSTRUCTION MASS SPEC RELOCATION
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York
BID FORM
Submitted by: Date
To: Brenda Frank, Manager
Facilities Contracts
121 Humphreys Service Building
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14853
Gentlemen:
The undersigned,
(Name of Bidder)
a
(Type of Firm, State of Incorporation, if applicable)
of
(Address)
having carefully examined the Short Form Contract, the Invitation to Bid and associated Bid Documents as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all
material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery, tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance
with the said documents for the following considerations:
BASE BID
a. All work complete, for the sum of
($ )
for MATERIALS, SUPPLIES, LABOR, and
SERVICES AND ALL OTHER COSTS.
START OF WORK AND TIME FOR COMPLETION
a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within five (5) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to complete the
project no later than June 16th, 2021.
ACCEPTANCE
a. The undersigned agrees that this Proposal shall remain in force and effect for a period of not less than sixty (60) calendar days following the bid due date or such other time as
may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor.
b. If written notice of acceptance of this Proposal is mailed, telegraphed or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) calendar days after the date of opening of Bids, or any time
thereafter before this Proposal is withdrawn, the undersigned will within ten (10) calendar days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing or delivery of such notice, execute an
Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted.
c. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to accept any of the Alternate Proposals listed within thirty (30) calendar days following the award of a construction
contract.
d. It is understood and agreed that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, to waive any informalities in bidding, and to hold all proposals for the above noted
period of time.
ADDENDUM RECEIPT
a. Receipt of the following addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
Addendum No. Dated:
CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION
By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party thereto certifies as to its own organization,
under penalty of perjury, that to the best of his knowledge and belief:
a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter
relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any competitor.
b. Unless required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder prior to opening,
directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or with any competitor.
c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership, or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
(Bidder)
By:
Title:
Dated:
CERTIFICATE AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER
I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within this Bid Form for General Contractors;
that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation; that I know his signature; that
his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed, sealed and executed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing
body.
(Secretary-Clerk)
(CORPORATE SEAL)
Dated:
Rev.: 02-2017 BID FORM BF-
self pricing Olin 201/07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING.pdf 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1 SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section
Includes: 1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications: a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. b. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction and at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product
Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance
with requirements for lowemitting materials. C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation
of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a
particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an
engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping
system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according
to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT
CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping
system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written
instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items
to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or
cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping
system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide
rated systems complying with the following requirements: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 3 a. Penetration firestopping
systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) FM Approval in its "Approval Guide." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc. e.
Passive Fire Protection Partners. f. RectorSeal. g. Specified Technologies, Inc. h. Tremco, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with
ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential
of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance
rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 4 E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill
materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled
devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete
formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled
collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced
intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers.
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders,
hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding
pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings
with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and
cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 5 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with
penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds,
mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART
3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates,
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before
installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces
of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating
items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove
laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine
primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 6 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming
permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials,
accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall
Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than
3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding
30 feet. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing
by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation
that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION
07 84 13
self pricing Olin 201/07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS.pdf 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone
joint sealants. 2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Butyl joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for
sealing joints in sound-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system,
include printed statement of VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available
for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½-inch-wide joints formed between
two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant
application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed
by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions
of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used
inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous
substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 775 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint
Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT (ES-1): Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus
50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS2000 SilPruf. c. Pecora Corporation; PCS. OLIN 201
MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT (ES-2): Nonstaining,
single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 100/50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. 2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based
Joint Sealants (RS-1): ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158.
2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex (LS-1): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant
Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer
based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type
B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density
to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable
to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces
in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean
porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include
the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Stucco. d. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not
stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by
preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions
for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant
backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry
materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply
with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint
configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately
after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents
that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise
indicated. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as
the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint
sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration
or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application 01: Exterior joints between aluminum storefront
and window framing members. 1. Joint Sealant: ES-1 (Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT). B. Joint-Sealant Application 02: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints between wall finish materials and frames of windows and storefronts. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: ES-2 (Silicone,
nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT). C. Joint-Sealant Application 03: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations:
a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: LS-1 (Acrylic latex). D. Joint-Sealant
Application 04: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 b. Other joints
as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: RS-1 (Butyl-rubber based). END OF SECTION 07 92 00 OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00
- 8 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
self pricing Olin 201/09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING.pdf 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 1 SECTION 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section
includes maintenance repainting as follows: 1. Cleaning, repair, patching, and preparation of substrates. 2. Repainting. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting,"
for Paint materials and systems for new construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than
five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. 2. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units
at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 4. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at
60 degrees. 6. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. 7. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. B. The following water spray pressures are defined: 1. Low-Pressure
Spray: 100 to 400 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. 2. Medium-Pressure Spray: 400 to 800 psi; 4 to 6 gpm. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform maintenance repainting in the following sequence, which
includes work specified in this and other Sections: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 2 1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted
objects and hardware except items indicated to remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect. 2. Verify that temporary protections have been installed. 3. Examine
condition of surfaces to be painted. 4. Perform repairs required to achieve smooth, sound surface ready to receive paint. 5. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each substrate
and surface condition of existing paint. 6. Apply paint system. 7. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product
Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples: For
each type of paint system and each pattern, color, and gloss; in sizes indicated below. 1. Include a list of materials for each coat of each Sample. 2. Label each Sample for location
and application. 3. Sample Size: a. Painted Surfaces: 4-by-8-inch Samples for each color and material, on hardboard. C. Product List: For each paint product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List"
for each MPI-product category specified in paint systems, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Color Matching: Custom computer-match paint
colors to match Architect's samples. B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of maintenance repainting processes for each type of coating system and substrate indicated and each color and finish
required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Duplicate appearance of approved Sample submittals. 1. Locate mockups on existing
surfaces where directed by Architect. 2. Surface-Preparation Mockups: On existing surfaces using applicable specified methods of cleaning and other surface preparation, provide mockup
sample of at least 100 sq. ft.. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 3 3. Coating Mockups: Two surfaces of at least 100
sq. ft. to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating system under same conditions as the completed Work. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval
of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved
mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered
containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials
and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with maintenance repainting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are
within the environmental limits set by each manufacturer's written instructions and specified requirements. B. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient
air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the
dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified
by manufacturer for surface preparation and during paint application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Hot Water: Water
heated to a temperature of 140 to 160 deg F. C. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), ½ cup of laundry detergent that contains
no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for every 5 gal. of solution required. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 4 D. Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job-mixed solution prepared by mixing ⅓ cup of household detergent that contains no
ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water. E. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, fine steel wool, steel
scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes. F. Rust Remover: Manufacturer's standard phosphoric acid-based gel formulation, also called "naval jelly," for removing corrosion
from iron and steel. 2.2 PAINT REMOVERS A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, waterrinsable, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation
for removing paint from masonry, stone, wood, plaster, or metal as required to suit Project; and containing no methanol or methylene chloride. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABR Products, Inc.; ABR Citrus Paint Removers or Super Bio
Strip Gel. b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; S-301, S-303, or S-305. c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 7 without paper covering, Smart Strip, or Smart Strip Pro. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.;
InStrip. e. PROSOCO, Inc.; Enviro Klean SafStrip or Enviro Klean SafStrip 8. 2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated
and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates
indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended
in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and,
for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints
and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 5 D. Colors: Match Architect's samples E. Transition Coat: Paint manufacturer's recommended coating for use where a residual
existing coating is incompatible with the paint system. 2.4 PAINT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. for each category of work in the Exterior Maintenance Repainting Schedule and Interior Maintenance
Repainting Schedule at the end of Part 3, or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams
Company (The). 2.5 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Metal-Patching Compound: Two-part, polyester-resin, metal-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer
for type of metal repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be produced for filling metal that has deteriorated from corrosion.
Filler shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. B. Cementitious Patching Compounds: Cementitious patching compounds and repair materials specifically manufactured
for filling cementitious substrates and for sanding or tooling prior to repainting; formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of cementitious substrate indicated,
exposure to weather and traffic, the detail of work, and site conditions. C. Gypsum Board Patching Compound: Setting-type joint taping compound according to ASTM C 475; paper tape where
required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products.
Prevent chemical solutions from coming into contact with people, motor vehicles, landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact. 1. Cover adjacent surfaces
with materials that are proven to resist chemical solutions being used unless the solutions will not damage adjacent surfaces. Use protective materials that are UV resistant and waterproof.
Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove masking
to prevent adhesive staining. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 6 2. Do not apply chemical solutions during winds of
sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces. 3. Neutralize and collect alkaline and acid wastes before disposal. 4. Dispose of runoff from operations by legal means and
in a manner that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors. 3.2 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING, GENERAL
A. Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 5 feet away from painted surface and from
building exterior at 20 feet away from painted surface. B. Execution of the Work: In repainting surfaces, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. Remove soil, mold,
mildew, algae, corrosion, and failed coatings. 2. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for repainting. 3. Allow other trades to repair and replace items in place before
repainting. 4. Repaint with sufficient coats to produce uniform appearance. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including
corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging surfaces. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.
D. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Maintenance Repainting
Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas. E. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle
methods, such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not abrade softer substrates, reducing clarity of detail. F. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates.
3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance
of painting work. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for inspection. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless moisture
content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and not greater than the following maximum values when measured with an electronic
moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 7 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 3. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within range recommended in writing
by paint manufacturer. Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions
and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. 1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper finishing by using specified surface-preparation
methods, notify Architect in writing. E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes
Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING A. General: Use the gentlest, appropriate method necessary to clean surfaces in preparation for painting.
Clean all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices. B. Detergent Hand Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle brushes. Scrub surface with detergent
solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to
ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. C. Detergent Spray Cleaning: 1. Wet surface with cold water
applied by low-pressure spray. 2. Scrub surface with detergent solution using medium-soft brushes until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes
to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. 3. Rinse with cold water applied by
low-pressure spray to remove detergent solution and soil. 4. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce surface ready to receive repainting. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 8 D. Solvent Cleaning: Use solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, smoke, tar, and asphalt from painted or unpainted
surfaces before other preparation work. Wipe surfaces with solvent using clean rags and sponges. If necessary, spot-solvent cleaning may be employed just prior to commencement of paint
application, provided enough time is allowed for complete evaporation. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wash to ensure that all foreign materials have been removed. Do
not use solvents, including primer thinner and turpentine, that leave residue. E. Mold, Mildew, and Algae Removal: 1. Wet surface with cold hot water applied by low-pressure spray.
2. Apply mold, mildew, and algae remover by brush or low-pressure spray. 3. Scrub surface with medium-soft brushes until mold, mildew, and algae are thoroughly dislodged and can be
removed by rinsing. Use small brushes for joints and crevices. Dip brush in mold, mildew, and algae remover often to ensure that adequate fresh cleaner is used and that surface remains
wet. 4. Rinse with cold water applied by low-pressure spray to remove mold, mildew, and algae remover and soil. 5. Repeat cleaning procedure above where required to produce surface
free of mold, mildew, and algae. F. Chemical Rust Removal: 1. Remove loose rust scale with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. 2. Apply rust remover with brushes or as recommended
in writing by manufacturer. 3. Allow rust remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. Do not allow extended
dwell time. 4. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags, or clean with method recommended in writing by manufacturer to remove residue. 5. Dry immediately
with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 6. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. G. Mechanical Rust Removal: 1. Remove
rust with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal. 2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags. 3. Dry immediately with
clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. 3.5 PAINT REMOVAL A. General: Remove paint
where indicated. Where cleaning methods have been attempted and further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or unsatisfactory surfaces for repainting, remove paint
to extent required by conditions. 1. Application: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface
for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 9
a. Apply materials to all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices, to provide a uniform final appearance without streaks. b. After work is complete, remove protection no longer
required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 2. Brushes: Use brushes that are resistant to chemicals being used. a. Metal Substrates: If using wire brushes on metal, use brushes of same
metal composition as metal being treated. 3. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure indicated, measured at nozzle. Adjust pressure
and volume to ensure that spray methods do not damage surfaces. a. Equip units with pressure gages. b. Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least 6 inches from surface and
apply material in horizontal, back-and-forth sweeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform coverage. c. For chemical spray application, use low-pressure tank or chemical
pump suitable for chemical indicated, equipped with nozzle having a cone-shaped spray. d. For water-spray application, use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25
to 50 degrees. e. For heated water-spray application, use equipment capable of maintaining temperature between 140 and 160 deg F at flow rates indicated. B. Paint Removal with Hand
Tools: Remove paint manually using hand-held scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, and metallic wool as appropriate for the substrate material. C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint
Remover: 1. Remove loose and peeling paint using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface
with brushes. 3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. 4. Remove chemicals and paint
residue by the following methods, as recommended in writing by paint remover manufacturer: a. Rinse with cold or hot water applied by low- or medium-pressure spray. b. Use mechanical
removal methods. 5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint. 3.6 SUBSTRATE REPAIR A. General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance
of adjacent materials and finishes. B. Cementitious Material Substrate: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 10 1. General:
Repair defects including dents and chips more than ¼ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with cementitious patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners.
2. Concrete, Cement Plaster, and Other Cementitious Products: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. If surfaces are too alkaline to paint, correct
this condition before painting. 3. Comply with Section 09 24 00 "Cement Plastering" for repairs requiring new cement plaster application. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Repair defects
including dents and chips more than ⅛ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with gypsum-plaster patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. 2. Rout
out surface cracks to remove loose, unsound material; fill with patching compound and sand smooth. D. Metal Substrate: 1. Preparation: Treat repair locations by wire-brushing and solvent
cleaning. Use chemical or mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust. 2. Defects in Metal Surfaces: Repair non-load-bearing defects in existing metal surfaces, including dents
and gouges more than ⅛ inch deep or ½ inch across and all holes and cracks by filling with metal-patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and protruding fasteners. 3. Priming:
Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flash rusting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces that are
inaccessible after completion of the Work. 3.7 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods unless otherwise indicated in this
Section. B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition. C. Apply a transition
coat over incompatible existing coatings. D. Metal Substrate: Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges before applying full coat. Apply two coats to surfaces that
are inaccessible after completion of the Work. Tint stripe coat different than the main coating and apply with brush. E. Blending Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates patched
into existing surfaces or touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system specified for the specific substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from edge to
edge and corner to corner. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 11 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday,
remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing,
scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other
trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades,
touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.9 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting according to applicable requirements
specified in this schedule. 1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to paragraphs below. 2. Where existing degree of soiling prevents examination, preclean
surface and allow it to dry before making an evaluation. 3. Repair substrate defects according to "Substrate Repair" Article. B. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface
Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Not required. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent
cleaning; use mold, mildew, and algae removal methods where needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods
to remove loose paint until only tightly adhered paint remains. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use mold, mildew, and algae removal methods where needed;
use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint
manufacturer's written instructions. D. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling. 2. Paint Removal:
Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01
90.52 - 12 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use mold, mildew, and algae removal methods where needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of
bare substrate if required. Sand surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for
substrate construction materials. E. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 3 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film severely deteriorated and surface indicated to
have paint completely removed. 2. Paint Removal: Completely remove paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. Remove rust. 3. Preparation for Painting: Prepare bare
cleaned surface according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. F. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 4 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface
Condition: Missing material, small holes and openings, and deteriorated or corroded substrate. 2. Substrate Preparation: Repair, replace, and treat substrate according to "Substrate
Repair" Article and requirements in other Specification Sections. 3. Preparation for Painting: Sand substrate surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges and prepare according to
paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. Remove rust. 4. Painting: Paint as required for MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation. 3.10 INTERIOR
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Masonry (CMU) Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI RIN 4.2L: a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For unpainted CMU, block
filler. 2) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 3) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. b. Block Filler: Block filler, latex,
interior/exterior, MPI #4. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec Hi-Build Masonry Block Filler. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat:
Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. B. Ferrous Metal Substrates: Metal doors and
frames: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 13 1. Latex System: MPI RIN 5.1N system over a transition coat. a. Prime Coat
Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface
degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #23. 1) Benjamin Moore; Coronado Rust Scat Metal Primer. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching
topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. 1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC
Latex System over Waterborne Primer: MPI RIN 9.2M: a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface
degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Stain Blocking, Water Based, MPI #137. 1) Benjamin
Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500
Interior Flat Finish. d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. END OF SECTION
09 01 90.52 OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 14 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
self pricing Olin 201/09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING.pdf 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section
Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type
of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements
for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B.
Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel
Network, Inc. (The). OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 6) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:
0.0296 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing
members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6) Steel
Network, Inc. (The). 7) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where
indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and
fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior
partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: provide one of
the following: 1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2). 2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection Track. 3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems;
SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 4) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 5) Metal-Lite; The System. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD. 7) Telling Industries; Vertical
Slip Track. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring
Channels: ASTM C 645. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. 2. Depth:
⅞ inch. F. Resilient Furring Channels: ½-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 2. Configuration: Asymmetrical. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed
Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing
hangers to structure. b. Type: Adhesive anchor. c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless
otherwise indicated. 2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM
A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and
cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials
that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten
steel members to substrates. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 B. Isolation Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell
vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, ⅛ inch thick, in width to suit steel face width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and
substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum
Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections
securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for
assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install continuous isolation foam gasket between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks
at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 -
5 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs
at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control
joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings
the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to
concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Resilient Furring: 1. Install horizontally to walls
with attachment leg down and open leg up. 2. Apply continuous foam gasket to contact surface of resilient channels. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening
surfaces vary not more than ⅛ inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to
spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building
structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers
only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations
of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental
suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying,
either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid
suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install
suspension systems that are level to within ⅛ inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive
finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16
self pricing Olin 201/09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD.pdf 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior
gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in gypsum board construction. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing"
for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND
HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage.
Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install
panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular
shape. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and
widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness:
½ inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Application: Where indicated on Drawings. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness:
⅝ inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling. 3. Application: All locations except where ½-inch is indicated on Drawings. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead:
L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 2.4 JOINT
TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied
on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First
Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from rock wool. D. Acoustical Sealant: Comply with Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling.
Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports
or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make
joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support
framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire,
air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect
structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow ¼- to ⅜-inch-wide joints to install
acoustical sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels
so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Acoustical Treatment: At all partitions, seal construction at perimeters, behind
control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions
above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces
unless otherwise indicated. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum
panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than
one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls,
apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset
at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated or sound-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides
of partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended
for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints
according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended
to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM
BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include,
but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00
self pricing Olin 201/09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING.pdf 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes
surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel and iron. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section
08 12 13 "Hollow Metal Frames" for shop priming of hollow metal frames. 2. Section 09 01 90.52 "Maintenance Repainting" for preparation and painting of existing interior and exterior
surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85
degrees. 2. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
4. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units
at 60 degrees. 7. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions. 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO
PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings
and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures
continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide product indicated in the Interior Painting Schedule, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes,
Inc. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved
Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 1. Materials for use within each paint system
shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2.
For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications
that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat
Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. D. Colors: Linen White 912 – Benjamin Moore PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance
of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that
finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating
application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates,
and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection
before surface preparation and painting. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 1. After completing painting operations, use workers
skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including
dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce
paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Shop-Primed
Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA
1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched
surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,
paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items
to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified
in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats
to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: Equipment, including panelboards. a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated
plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Metal conduit. e. Plastic conduit. f. Metal ducts. g. Other items as directed by Architect. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of
metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags,
and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do
not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing,
replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1R: Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive,
for metal, MPI #79. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Topcoat: Latex, interior,
high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish. B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural
Latex System MPI INT 5.3M: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. Benjamin
Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. Topcoat, Visible Duct Interiors: Latex, interior, high
performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen Finish. Topcoat, All Other: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Gloss Finish. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M:
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional
low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior
Flat Finish. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. END OF SECTION 09 91
23
self pricing Olin 201/22 05 23_12 - ball valves for plumbing piping 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 22 05 23_12 - ball valves for plumbing piping 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 1 SECTION 22 05 23.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes bronze ball valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1.
Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against
rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B. Use the following precautions during
storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground
in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points. OLIN
201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source
Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10
and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance:
NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service. D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy
(brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.
F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4. H. Valves in Insulated Piping:
1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of non-thermal-conductive material and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals
or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1.
Manufacturers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 3 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two-piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Soldered
or threaded. f. Seats: RTFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. i. Port: Standard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness,
freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions
from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating
flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable
for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions
or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support
where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install valve tags. Comply
with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 4 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves
with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered ends. 3.4 DOMESTIC HOT-
AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Two-piece, bronze ball valve with stainless-steel
trim. END OF SECTION 22 05 23.12
self pricing Olin 201/22 05 23_14 - check valves for plumbing piping 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 22 05 23_14 - check valves for plumbing piping 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.14 - 1 SECTION 22 05 23.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes bronze swing check valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve.
1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against
rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in
watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.14 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations
for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34
for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder joint. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end
connections. D. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service. E. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze
valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. F. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures. G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. 2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class
125, Bronze, Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. 2. Description:
a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
f. Disc: Bronze. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.14 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping
and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe
for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper
size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate
valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow
full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. F. Install valve tags. Comply
with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping
systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN201-BID CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.14 - 4 B. End Connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered. 3.5 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER
VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves, Class 125, bronze disc with soldered or threaded end connections. END OF SECTION 22 05 23.14
self pricing Olin 201/22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN201-BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 1 SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Fastener systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization
Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects
of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART
2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized
Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless
steel. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN201-BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2 B. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel
or stainless steel. 2.2 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A
36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable
for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER
AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support
piping from the building structure. B. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick
in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool
manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN201-BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 3 C. Install hangers
and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. D. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural
steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete
inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that
piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes
and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments
and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of
field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections
specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports
with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports or metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated
pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN201-BID PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 4 G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension
of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for
hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable,
Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split
Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 9. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 10. Clips (MSS
Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections,
install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and
except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. J. Building Attachments:
Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment
to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural
shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of
bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For
structural shapes. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN201-BID
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 5 8. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following
for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 9. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or
wooden beams. K. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. L. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion
anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 22 05 29
self pricing Olin 201/22 05 53 - identification for plumbing piping and equipment 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 22 05 53 - identification for plumbing piping and equipment 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1 SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe labels. 2. Valve tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve numbering scheme. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Actioncraft Products,
Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 5. Marking Services Inc. 6. Seton Identification Products.
B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled,
semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 2 E. Pipe Label Contents: Include
identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows:
Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according
to ASME A13.1 for piping. 2.2 VALVE TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Craftmark Pipe
Markers. 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 5. Marking Services Inc. 6. Seton Identification Products. B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation
and 1/2inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: 1-1/2-inch-diameter, brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass
wire-link chain. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location
of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond
of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation
of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 3 B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying
devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting." B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with
ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C.
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels,
and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar
access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each
run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Directional Flow
Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. E. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air
Piping: Black letters on yellow background. 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated
equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a
valve schedule. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 4 B. Valve-Tag Application
Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Low-Pressure
Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches, round. END OF SECTION 22 05 53
self pricing Olin 201/22 15 13 - General-Service Compressed-Air Piping 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 22 15 13 - General-Service Compressed-Air Piping 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 1 SECTION 22 15 13 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems, as follows: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Joining materials.
3. Valves. 4. Dielectric fittings. 5. Specialties. 6. Quick couplings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities
and operating characteristics. 3. Quick couplings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Brazing certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance
data. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Brazing: Qualify processes
and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or with AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance
Qualification." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Compressed-Air Service: Do not interrupt compressed-air service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted
under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary compressed-air service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner
no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of compressed-air service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of compressed-air service without Construction Manager's and
Owner's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. ASME Compliance: 1. Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air piping.
2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air piping. 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Schedule 40, Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S,
Grade B, black or hot-dip zinc coated with ends threaded in accordance with ASME B1.20.1. 1. Steel Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106, Schedule 40, galvanized seamless
steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded. 3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, threaded.
4. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel, threaded. 5. Wrought-Steel, Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule 40. 6. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or
300, carbon steel. B. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K or L seamless, drawn-temper, water tube. 1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, wrought
copper with dimensions for brazed joints. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 3 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy
Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123. C. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size
as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed-air piping system
contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125,
cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise
indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux in accordance with ASTM B813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus
alloys for generalduty brazing, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 VALVES A. Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, and Gate Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves
for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with
separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following: a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Jomar Valve. c. Matco-Norca. d. Viega LLC. e. WATTS. f. Wilkins. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 4 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End
Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.6 SPECIALTIES A. Air-Line Pressure Regulators, Bronze Body: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded
manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200 psig minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Mechanical Filters: Two-stage, mechanical-separation, air-line filters.
Equip with deflector plates, resin-impregnated-ribbon filters with edge filtration, and drain cock. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. 2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS A. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Aeroquip Performance Products; Eaton, Hydraulics Sector. 2. Bowes Manufacturing Inc. 3. Parker
Hannifin Corp. 4. Tuthill Corporation. B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air
hose. C. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With one-way
valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting. 2. Plug End: Straight-through type with barbed outlet for attaching hose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING
APPLICATIONS A. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40, black-steel pipe;
threaded, malleable-iron fittings; and threaded joints. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13
- 5 2. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed or soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Metal General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements
and use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," and Section 22 05 23.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing Piping," according
to the following: 1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified for low-pressure compressed air. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor
sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping concealed from view and protected
from physical contact by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment
rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow
sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space. E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for
service and maintenance. F. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating unless
otherwise indicated. G. Install eccentric reducers where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush. H. Install branch
connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points. I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
J. Install piping free of sags and bends. K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 6 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag,
dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound
to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections
that have cracked or open welds. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join in accordance with AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813,
water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Join in accordance with ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket
suitable for compressed air. Join flanges with gasket and bolts in accordance with ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure. G. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping" and Section 22 05 23.14 "Check Valves for Plumbing
Piping." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric
unions. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES A. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment. B. Install mechanical filters in compressed-air piping at or near air
compressors and downstream from coalescing filters. Mount on wall at locations indicated. C. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 7 D. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and
at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. B. Install hangers for copper tubing and steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to
comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. C. Install hangers for aluminum piping, with maximum horizontal
spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.
D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and steel piping to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes,
and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. F. Support vertical runs of aluminum piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally
enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. G. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 1. 100 Ft. or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable,
steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Ft.: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. H. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Ft. or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze. I. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. 3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air
piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field tests and
inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 8 1. Piping Leak
Tests for Metal Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to
pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required,
to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. 2. Piping Leak Tests for Aluminum Compressed-Air Piping: Test new piping system and modified parts of existing piping
system. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping system to pressure of 15 psig, hold pressure for 10 minutes. Repeat until reaching required operating pressure, not to exceed
220 psig. Once desired operating pressure is met, let stand for one hour. 3. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 4. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 22 15 13
self pricing Olin 201/23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC_21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC_21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Testing,
adjusting, and balancing of existing HVAC systems and equipment. 3. HVAC-control system verification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental
Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform
TAB work. F. TDH: Total dynamic head. G. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 B. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit
TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures, as specified in "Preparation" Article. C. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialists Qualifications, Certified by AABC:
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC. B. TAB Specialists Qualifications,
Certified by NEBB or TABB: 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB. C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply
with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." D. Code and AHJ Compliance: TAB is required to comply with governing codes and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts
with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.
C. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions
about HVAC system and equipment controls. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 D.
Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired
or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed
under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems,"
or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. E. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control
testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. F. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. G. Examine HVAC
equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. H. Examine terminal units,
such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. I. Examine temporary and permanent strainers. Verify that temporary
strainer screens used during system cleaning and flushing have been removed and permanent strainer baskets are installed and clean. J. Examine control valves for proper installation
for their intended function of isolating, throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
L. Examine control dampers for proper installation for their intended function of isolating, throttling, diverting, or mixing air flows. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and
during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be
used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include,
at a minimum, the following: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 1. Airside: a.
Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. c. Volume, smoke, and fire
dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed. e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup
is complete and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed. i. Windows and doors are installed. j. Suitable access to
balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system in accordance with the procedures
contained in any of the following and in this Section: 1. AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance." 2. ASHRAE 111. 3. NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing of Environmental Systems." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment casings for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Where holes for probes are required in piping or hydronic
equipment, install pressure and temperature test plugs to seal systems. 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier,
and finish. C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with
paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. 3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Test, adjust, and balance HVAC equipment
indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Fans and ventilators. 2. Terminal units. 3. Air-handling units. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and
outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic
diagrams of systems' Record drawings duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts
for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and
mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total
indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position
that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close
to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. 2. Measure
fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through
the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures
are measured. 3. Review Contractor-prepared shop drawings and Record drawings to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect
factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 05 93 - 6 4. Obtain approval from Owner for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for
adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer,
and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been
adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets
and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. D. Verify final system conditions. 1.
Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to design if necessary. 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.
3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust
if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems
as follows: 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge. 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure
control. 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering
static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed
to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05
93 - 7 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers
require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record
calibration factor. c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e.
Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design
airflow. f. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to
full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure. 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to
deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates
minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow, so that connected total
matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building. c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube
traverses close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow. d. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.
6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan
inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the
time static pressures are measured. 7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air
ducts and inlets. b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow. 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit, and
adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls Contractor.
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 8 9. Verify final system conditions as follows:
a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is
within design. c. Re-measure final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and
adjust if necessary. Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced
conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured
voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency
Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation. 3.9 HVAC CONTROLS VERIFICATION A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following: 1. Verify HVAC
control system is operating within the design limitations. 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers are calibrated
and function as intended. 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper
actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated
by controller: open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure. B. Reporting:
Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 9 3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing
equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan and equipment with fan(s). 2. Measure and record flows,
temperatures, and pressures of each piece of equipment in each hydronic system. Compare the values to design or nameplate information, where information is available. 3. Measure motor
voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 4. Check the condition of coils. 5. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 6. Report
on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. TAB After Construction: Before performing testing and balancing of renovated
existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished in accordance with renovation scope indicated
by Contract Documents. Verify the following: 1. Coils are clean and fins combed. 2. Fans are clean. 3. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 4. Deficiencies noted in the
preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work. 1. Compare the indicated
airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils. 2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the
renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer. 3. If calculations increase or decrease
the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments
are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust
Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, within 10 cfm. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent.
If design value is less than 100 cfm, within 10 cfm. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05
93 - 10 B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.12 PROGRESS REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based
on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systembalancing devices. Recommend changes and additions
to system-balancing devices, to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance-measur
ing and -balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of
deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.13 FINAL
REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet
at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers' test data.
3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General
Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's
name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with
the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING,
ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 11 11. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's
name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including
the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Heating coil, dry-bulb conditions.
e. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Variable-frequency controller settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for pressure
controller(s). h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system
with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units, include
the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g.
Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k.
Number, type, and size of filters. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 12 2. Motor
Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and speed. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure
in inches wg. c. Fan speed. d. Inlet and discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. For each filter bank, filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure
differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. List for each internal component
with pressure-drop, static-pressure differential in inches wg. j. Outdoor airflow in cfm. k. Return airflow in cfm. l. Outdoor-air damper position. m. Return-air damper position. F.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's
serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor
make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and speed. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center
dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING,
AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 13 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan speed. d. Discharge
static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. G. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct
cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System fan and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure
in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity
in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. H. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in
cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space
temperature in deg F. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 14 I. System-Coil Reports:
For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling-unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in
deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. J. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. END OF SECTION 23 05 93
self pricing Olin 201/23 31 13 - metal ducts_21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 23 31 13 - metal ducts_21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
1. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural
Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible." B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed
to SMACNA Seal Class "A." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly,
and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL
DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation
of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated
and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 13. Provide 1/4-inch-scale coordinated Shop Drawings for mechanical equipment
rooms and all supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in all spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other
building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial
access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction
and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Manufacturers: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint
types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Traverse joints shall
be made with couplings and two-part tape sealing system. 2. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class,
applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SHEET METAL
MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel:
Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4 C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets:
Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4
as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel
shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch
minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning
characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard,
durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch
wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated
and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method
24). C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and
mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION
6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel,
or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25.
5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl
rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger
Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel
Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable
End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments:
Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel
shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths, with sheet-metal couplings. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated
fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular
to building lines. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire
and smoke dampers. J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. After fabrication and prior to installation, seal ends of ductwork
with shrink-wrap. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION
OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed
bead. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish
the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers
and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO
PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed to SMACNA "Seal Class A." All transverse
joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed to Class A regardless of specified pressure class. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated
concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic
restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed
to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests
and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. All ductwork within duct enclosures above the roof, regardless of duct classification.
Complete testing, and submit report prior to installation of the roof of the enclosure. b. Ducts with a Pressure Class Lower than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling
no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area. c. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test all ductwork. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems
to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. a. Systems Designed to Operate at 3-Inch w.c. and Below: 25 percent of the duct system shall be tested. The
consultant/Owner shall randomly choose the sections of ductwork to be tested during the construction phase. If any of the original sections fail the leakage test, another 25 percent
of the duct shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25 percent fails, the entire system shall be leaktested. b. Systems Designed to Operate in Excess of 3-Inch w.c.:
The entire system shall be leak-tested. c. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA's "Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." d. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representative
from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of record. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure
of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. 7. Acceptable criteria for duct leakage tests: a. Interior Supply, Return, and General Exhaust Systems: 5 percent leakage,
tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. b. Interior Laboratory Exhaust Systems: 2 percent system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure.
c. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the "2012 ASHRAE HVAC System and Equipment Handbook of Recommendation," with final approval by Facilities Engineer. C. Duct System
Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL
DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective
if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service
openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels
for insulated duct. Patch insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible
ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting
vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors,
use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following components
by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except
ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing
box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils
and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators,
and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning
methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL
DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned
are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten
fins. 5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 3.8 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive above 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. B.
Elbow Configuration: 1. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio
and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter
ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller
in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID METAL
DUCTS 23 31 13 - 11 C. Branch Configuration: 1. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13
self pricing Olin 201/23 33 00 - air duct accessories_21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 23 33 00 - air duct accessories_21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED
DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Access Doors: The manufacturer shall
submit documentation of leakage tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments
to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings:
Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other,
using input from Installers of the items involved. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A,
"Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation:
G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and polished
stainless-steel finish for exposed ducts. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for
aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division
of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. g. Trox USA Inc. h. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating,
with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
23 33 00 - 3 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel to match system requirements. b. Mitered and welded corners.
c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. d. Galvanized- or stainless-steel to match system material, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or nonferrous metal to match system
material. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve to match system material. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less
shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 2.4 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test
Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit
duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. C. KF Fittings: Aluminum KF-type hose adapter
fitting with size and clamp accessory as required for existing hose attachment. Install on duct in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials
suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless
otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having
duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. E. Set dampers
to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install KF fittings on ducts in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. END OF SECTION 23 33 00
self pricing Olin 201/26 05 19 - low-voltage electrical power conductors and cables 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 05 19 - low-voltage electrical power conductors and cables 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wire rated 600 V or less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and
termination locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible,
insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6.
General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Republic Wire Inc. 8. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked
for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."
D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with applicable ASTM specifications for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type USE-2: Comply
with UL 854. 2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND
SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC
Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. ILSCO. 7. NSi Industries LLC. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of
Emerson Industrial Automation. 9. TE Connectivity Ltd. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Branch Circuits:
Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger. B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Stranded for No. 14 AWG and smaller. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS
AND WIRING METHODS A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and
floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"
prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceway. E. Provide supports according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN201-BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible
with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination,
and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations
of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 05 19
self pricing Olin 201/26 05 26 - grounding and bonding for electrical systems 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 05 26 - grounding and bonding for electrical systems 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Electrical equipment grounding
and bonding. 2. Communications equipment grounding and bonding. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply
with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division,
LLC. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors:
Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4
or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper:
Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal,
ground wire access from four directions, with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. C. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. D. Cable Tray Ground
Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable iron. E. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. F. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal
listed for direct burial. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 14 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 12 AWG and larger unless
otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all
feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Branch circuits. 2. Lighting
circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment
Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and
other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest
paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. END OF SECTION
26 05 26
self pricing Olin 201/26 05 29 - hangers and supports for electrical systems 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 05 29 - hangers and supports for electrical systems 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance:
Hangers and supports for electrical raceways and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI
7. 1. Design supports for raceways, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and system contents. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating
weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Hangers. b. Steel slotted support systems. c. Trapeze hangers. d. Equipment supports. 2. Include
rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which hangers and supports will be attached. 3. Size and
location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Speakers. c. Access panels. d. Projectors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings
of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems:
Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube
& Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. GS Metals Corp. f. G-Strut. g. Haydon Corporation.
h. Metal Ties Innovation. i. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. j. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. k. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Channel
Width: 1-5/8 inches. 4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4. 5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane,
or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26
05 29 - 3 6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping. 8. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings,
designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for
electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems." C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be
1/4 inch in diameter. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies:
Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used
for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items
and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved
toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS
SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4 transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage
requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for site-fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials
as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29
self pricing Olin 201/26 05 33 - raceways and boxes for electrical systems 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 05 33 - raceways and boxes for electrical systems 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. In-wall
storage boxes for audio-visual systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems;
a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson
Industrial Automation. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Southwire Company. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 2 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 11. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits,
tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1
and UL 6. D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC
jacket and complying with UL 360. H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. 2. Expansion Fittings:
PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. I. Joint Compound for
IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints
from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. 2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and
NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 - 3 C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate
with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND
CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. MonoSystems,
Inc. 11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions. 12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 13. Plasti-Bond. 14. RACO; Hubbell. 15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed
in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Sheet metal.
2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked
for intended location and application. E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires
weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material
as recessed box. H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. I. Gangable boxes are allowed. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with
continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel;
all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel. K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and
out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring
of different systems and voltage. 2.4 IN-WALL STORAGE BOX FOR AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide Chief "PAC526FW" and "PAC526FCW" or approved equal. 1. Refer
to Drawings to quantities of each. B. Equipment storage box recessed in-wall for audio visual equipment, typically installed behind a wall-mounted flat panel display. Power outlet
(not included with product), conduit, and data network jacks (not included with product) typically attached to/installed inside box. Flange for edge trim included. Contractor providing
in-wall box shall also provide specified power outlets, data jacks, conduit connections, and other accessories necessary to install the in-wall box. AV Contractor shall provide AV
connectors. C. Color: White. D. Switch Boxes for Electrical Outlet or Data Network Jacks: 1. Available Product: RACO #560. 2. 2.75 inches deep. E. Acoustic Putty: 1. Available
Product: Kinetics Noise Control IsoBacker. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 -
5 F. Accessories: 1. Provide all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets, and other components to ensure complete, functional, and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to
Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating
Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations:
GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel or nonmetallic in wet locations. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. C. Raceway
Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in
PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use
setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply
with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with
NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS
AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above
water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends
in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished
walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller
than No. 4 AWG. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely on locknuts to
penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. N. Cut conduit perpendicular
to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use
polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. P. Expansion-Joint Fittings: 1. Install
expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS
AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7 2. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions
for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Q. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a
maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated. S. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of
walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. U. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more
than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. V. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure.
Do not support boxes by conduits. W. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. X. In-Wall Storage Box for Audio-Visual Systems: 1. General: a. Install all systems
to comply with NFPS Section 70 National Electric Code, and local/state codes, ordinances, regulations, recommendations, guidelines and directives, in a manner which complies with accepted
industry standards of good practice, the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not constitute a life or physical safety hazard. b. Comply with manufacturer’s
written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. c. Install all products at locations and heights indicated
on Drawings. d. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. e. Metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the National Electric Code for proper
grounding. f. Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s
installation sheets. g. All products described in this specification shall be installed plumb and square unless specifically detailed otherwise. h. All supports shall meet or exceed
the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID RACEWAYS AND
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8 i. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, the Contractor shall seal penetrations with appropriate firestopping systems
in accordance with Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." j. The Contractor shall investigate the presence of post-tension rods before drilling into concrete floors/ceilings.
2. In-wall box interior shall remain open and clear of obstructions to allow for installation of audio-visual system devices. This includes but is not limited to power outlets, data
network jacks, and conduit stubs. In accordance with manufacturer instructions, power outlets and data network jacks shall be installed on the outside of the in-wall box facing inward.
3. In-wall box shall be secured to the building structure per manufacturer instructions. Conduit shall not bear the weight of the in-wall box. 4. Conduit shall terminate on the in-wall
box. No free air cable runs from conduit to box. 5. Included flange shall be installed to conceal rough-cut of finished wall material. 6. Conduit containing AC power cables shall terminate
at the in-wall box on the opposite side of the box from conduit containing low voltage audio visual system cables. 7. Conduit ends shall not have sharp edges, or have an insulated bushing
installed to protect wire pulls from damage. 8. Conduit to the in-wall box intended for low-voltage audio-visual systems may not be shared by other trades or services, except by written
consent from the Owner’s Representative. 9. Do not install in-wall storage boxes back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6-inch separation. Install with minimum 24-inch separation
in acoustic-rated walls. 10. In-wall box shall be installed flush with finished wall material. 11. Acoustical treatment to be installed behind in-wall storage box: The complete outside
surface of each of these in-wall storage boxes shall be treated with acoustical putty. 12. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with AV Contractor for installation of AV connectors
in-wall boxes. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2.
Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33
self pricing Olin 201/26 05 53 - identification for electrical systems 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 05 53 - identification for electrical systems 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 4. Miscellaneous identification
products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other
features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant
coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend
machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed,
multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall
include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance
Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 3. Arc Flash Protection Label: a. Items: Arc Flash Protection Label.
b. Type: Format 9. c. Color: White on red header/black on white body. d. Height: 5 inches. e. Width: 7 inches. f. Legend: “DANGER – ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD, APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED,
HAZARD CATEGORY -1.” g. Material: Write-on vinyl with acrylic adhesive. 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed,
in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. B. Self-Adhesive,
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic
or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. D. Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof,
black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26
05 53 - 3 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint
system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws
with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification
materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require
finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification
device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Warning
Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels. 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 2. Apply
to exterior of door, cover, or other access. B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams,
schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal
cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters
on 11/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of
the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be
self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. END OF SECTION 26 05
53
self pricing Olin 201/26 27 26 - wiring devices 21022OLIN201.pdf Microsoft Word - 26 27 26 - wiring devices 21022OLIN201
OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This
Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Specifications
for data outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. TVSS: Transient voltage
surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated
wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. C. Comply with NFPA 70. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN201-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. Where Basis-of-Design Product is indicated below, provide named product or approved equal by one of the following Bryant, Cooper (Arrow-Hart), Hubbell, P&S, or Leviton. Provide one
manufacturer for each category, for entire Project. B. Receptacles–General Usage: 1. General Requirements: Duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding. a. 20 Amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz. b. NEMA
configuration: 5-20R. c. Parallel-blade, double-wipe contacts; NEMA grounding slot. d. UL-listed and meeting Federal Specification WC596. 2. Standard: a. Quick-connect “plugtail” type.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT5362 series. 3. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs), Specification grade, feed through a. Trip level: 4 to 6 mA; trip time: .025 second nominal.
b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT2095 series. 4. TVSS: a. Same as paragraph 3 above except TVSS. 5. Duplex tamper-resistant receptacles with two USB charging ports, 15-A rating.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #TMB26USBLACC6. 6. Special-Purpose Receptacles: a. Sizes and NEMA ratings as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Wall Plates: 1. Interior for Recessed
Outlet Boxes: a. Finished Spaces: OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 1) Brushed aluminum. 2) Single multi-gang
plate for multiple devices at one location. 3) Manufacturer: Same as devices. 2. Interior for Surface Steel Outlet Boxes: a. Galvanized sheet steel; rounded edges. b. Single multi-gang
plate for multiple devices at one location. c. Manufacturer: Appleton, General Electric, Pyle National, Steel City, Universal. 3. Weatherproof: a. GFCI receptacle, with cover; wet
location-rated while in use. Provide at all exterior locations, at all interior wet locations, and as indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Manufacturers: Taymac, Carlon, P&S. 2.2 FINISHES
A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grey. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency/Standby
Power System: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. 1. Duplex Receptacles:
18 inches above finished floor to centerline. 2. Outlets above Counter: 42 inches above finished floor; coordinate with Architectural elevations and counter installation. B. Coordination
with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers
that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that
may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled
flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID
WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 C. The location of any device box may be changed a distance of 10 feet from starting location before device is actually installed, at no extra charge.
D. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed
for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA
70, Article 300, without pigtails. E. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise
protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to
branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly
clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No.
12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes,
remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. F. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted
receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when
standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with
grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where
protection of downstream receptacles is not required. OLIN 201 MOBILIZATION 6-44 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN201-BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 3.3 FIELD QUALITY
CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring
analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent
Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified
in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance
at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units, and replace
with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION 26 27 26
self pricing Olin 201/BL Asbestos Report - Snee Olin Lab renovations.pdf Microsoft Word - 2289.003 Snee Olin Hall -041921.docx
Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey Snee Hall – Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations Prepared For Chaing O’Brien Architects Crescent Building
217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 April 2021 Snee & Olin Halls – Cornell University Ithaca, New York Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovati
ons Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey April 2021 Prepared For Chiang O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850
Prepared By Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 11 Centre Park, Suite 203 Rochester, New York 14614 Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21
‐ i ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Table of Contents Section Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................
........................... 1 1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK .............................................................................................................................. 3 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS .....................
............................................................................................... 4 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM ...........................................................
.................. 5 5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ................................................................................................. 6 6.0 DISCUSSION ........................
.............................................................................................................. 7 Tables Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ..........................
........................................................... 5 Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form ....................................................................................................
....... 6 Appendices Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain‐of‐Custody Records Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.
C. Asbestos License and Certificates Appendix D Laboratory Certificates Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 1 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. (B&L), was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited prerenovation asbestos survey for the Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab renovation pr
oject at Snee and Olin Halls on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The purpose of the survey was to identify and quantify suspect asbestos‐containing materials (ACMs) prior
to the Researchers Planning & Enabling Work project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous survey information and drawings provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. T
he inspection was conducted on March 19, 2021. This report represents the conditions of the property at the time of the survey. Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled
by B&L’s New York State Certified Asbestos Inspectors. These materials included ceiling panels, lab bench, glued on ceiling tile, ceiling tile glue, and canvas covered corkboard.
The following material was presumed to be ACM base on previous sampling data: Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations Material Code Description Quantity Location FLVCT‐AAA
12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 2,451 SF Snee Hall SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic 39 SF Snee Hall HOOD‐AAA Transite Fume Hood (not impacted by this project)
60 SF Snee Hall GLAZE‐AAA Grey Window Glaze (not impacted by this project) 10 SF Snee Hall The other materials sampled were found to contain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and a
re, therefore, categorized as non‐ACM. Refer to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition, and quantity of ACM in the building. Since the building is slate
d for renovation, all materials identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted during the course of the project should be abated by a licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to
commencement of renovation activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires that a copy of this report to be kept on site during all phases of construction.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 2 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. INTRODUCTION B&L was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a
n asbestos inspection of Snell and Olin Halls located on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to determine the presence and quantity of ACM/PACM p
rior to Researchers Planning & Enabling Work project renovations. B&L’s inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) accredited inspectors Michael Goff (Certificate No
. 01‐07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19‐00091). B&L’s license and each inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C. The inspection was performed on March
19, 2021. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 3 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. SCOPE OF WORK The above referenced buildings were surveye
d for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non‐friable materials were sampled. Prior asbes
tos survey investigation data conducted by Delta in both Snee and Olin Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data from Olin Hall is quite extensive.
The inspection was performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended and ad
opted March 21, 2007), Section 56‐5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling, and Repair. Inspection procedures followed the requirements of the En
vironmental Protection Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E ‐ Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA).
When suspect ACM was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be ACM or sampled. The condition of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table 1. The sample loc
ation was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form. Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York State Department of
Health (NYSDOH) Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for analys
is. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 4 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. ANALYTICAL METHODS Bulk samples collected at the building were anal
yzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street, New York, New York. AmeriSci is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Polarized L
ight Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number 200546‐0). AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health under the Environmental Laboratory Approval P
rogram (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480). Samples were analyzed by polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized Light Microscopy Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asb
estos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1). Samples were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample in the set was analyzed. A material was classified as non‐asbestos c
ontaining only if each sample in the set was determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%). Non‐friable organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor tiles, mastic and roofing materials
, and ceiling tiles/panels containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed using the NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method for Identifying and Quantifying A
sbestos in Non‐Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed that the asbestos content was <1%, the material was considered non‐asbestos containing.
Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 5 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM The quantities of the homogeneous ACM
/PACM identified within the building are summarized on Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous material code and presents the location, class, description, condition, and quantity of the
ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each ACM/PACM found in the building has been calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The information presented on the form is derived fro
m the sample results and proposed work area floor plans. Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall
Ithaca, NY March 19, 2021 Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM? FLVCTAAA 1149 M 12”x12” Black
w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile Not Sampled Good 559 PACM 1156 M Good 1238 PACM 3158 M Good 654 PACM TOTAL 2,451 SF SINKAAA 1149 M Counter Top
Black Mastic Not Sampled Good 3 PACM 1156 M Good 15 PACM 2157 M Good 3 PACM 3158 M Good 18 PACM TOTAL 39 SF HOODAAA 3158 M Transite Fume
Hood Not Sampled Fair 60 PACM TOTAL 60 SF M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal *Additional (GLAZE‐AAA) grey window glaze locations and quantities will be listed i
f the project scope changes to include removal of classroom/laboratory doors. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21
‐ 6 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at the building. It lists the material code, material description, sampl
e location, sample ID, and the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM analyses are presented as appropriate. Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 215
7 Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY March 19, 2021 Material Code Material Description Sample Location Sample ID Analytical Results PLM TEM Snee Hall
FLVCTAAA 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile –B&L 1/2020 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic – Delta 8/27/13 report Not Sampled Not Sampled
PACM PACM HOODAAA Fume Hood– Delta 8/5/19 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM GLAZEAAA Grey Window Glaze – B&L 1/2020 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM CLTL‐1
1’x1’ Fissured Glued‐On Ceiling Tile 1156 1156 CLTL‐1‐1 CLTL‐1‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLGL‐2 Brown Ceiling Tile Glue 1156 1156 CLGL‐2‐1 CLGL‐2‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CANVAS‐3 Canvas Corkboard C
over 1149 1149 CANVAS‐3‐1 CANVAS‐3‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLGL‐4 Tan Ceiling Tile Glue 1156 1156 CLGL‐4‐1 CLGL‐4‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD Olin Hall CLLI‐1 2’x4’ Smooth White Vinyl
Covered Ceiling Panel w/ Grey Speckle 201 201 CLLI‐1‐1 CLLI‐1‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BENCH‐2 Black Lab Bench 101 101 101 BENCH‐2‐1 BENCH‐2‐2 BENCH‐2‐3 NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD
NAD CLLI‐3 2’x4’ Long Deep Fissure Ceiling Panel 101 101 CLLI‐3‐1 CLLI‐3‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLLI‐4 2’x4’ Long Fissure Ceiling Panel 101 101 CLLI‐4‐1 CLLI‐4‐2 NAD NAD
NAD NAD Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 7 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. DISCUSSION Of the suspect materials sampled by B&L from Snee Hal
l, none are considered asbestos containing as per laboratory analysis. 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile (FLVCT‐AAA) was determined to be asbestos containing in B&L’s previous sampling. Bla
ck floor tile mastic associated with this tile was determined non‐asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black Trespa countertops are non‐asbestos as per Delta’s survey, but (SINK‐AAA) associated countertop
black mastic is asbestos containing. The fume hood in Room 3158 is presumed asbestos based on Delta’s sampling report. Grey window glazing on interior door glass was sampled by B&L in January of
2020 and is asbestos containing but should not be impacted by based on the scope of this project. Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sampling in Olin Hall. Some suspect asbestos materials in
the proposed renovation area were determined non‐asbestos through Delta’s sampling and subsequent laboratory analysis. Four additional suspect material, not covered by Delta’s report, were sampled
by B&L and are non‐asbestos as per laboratory analysis. The fume hood in Room 101 may be asbestos containing transite, but is not scheduled to be impacted by renovations. Appendix A
Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data CANVAS-3-1,2 CLTL-1-1,2 CLGL-2-1,2 CLGL-4-1,2 CLLI-1-1,2 BENCH-2-1,2,3CLLI-3-1,2 CLLI-4-1,2 Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
Snee Hall – Cornell University EAS Consolidation Design Prepared for Chaing O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 January 2020
Snee Hall – Cornell University Ithaca, New York Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey January 2020 Prepared for Chiang O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217
North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 Prepared by Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 11 Centre Park, Suite 203 Rochester, New York 14614 Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos
Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - i - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ....................................................................................
.............................................. 1 1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................
2 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................... 3 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS ............................
........................................................................................ 4 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM .....................................................................
........ 5 5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ................................................................................................. 7 6.0 DISCUSSION........................................
.............................................................................................. 9 Tables Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ...................................................
......................... 5 Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form .................................................................................................. 7 Appendices Appendix
A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain-of-Custody Records Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates
Appendix D Laboratory Certificates Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 1 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
(B&L) was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited prerenovation asbestos survey at Snee Hall on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The purpose
of the survey was to identify and quantify suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) prior to the EAS Consolidation renovation project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous
survey information and drawings provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. A portion of the second floor of Olin Hall was included as part of the survey since
the area will be used as transition space during the project. The inspection was conducted on January 8, 2020. This report represents the conditions of the property at the time of
the survey. Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled by B&L’s New York State Certified Asbestos Inspector. These materials included cove base, cove base
mastic, caulk materials, window glaze, ceiling panel, floor leveler, ceiling panels, sink undercoating, pipe sealant, floor tile, mastic material, and firestop. The following materials
were determined to be ACM: Material Code Description Quantity Location GLAZE-7 Grey Window Glaze TBD Snee Hall FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 13,284 SF Snee Hall
The following material was presumed to be ACM: Material Code Description Quantity Location SINK-AAA Counter Top Black Mastic 17 SF Snee Hall The other materials sampled were found
to contain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and are, therefore, categorized as non-ACM. Refer to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition,
and quantity of ACM in the building. Since the building is slated for renovation, all materials identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted during the course of the project should
be abated by a licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to commencement of renovation activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires that this report
be forwarded to the Commissioner of Labor through the Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos Control Bureau and to the local government agency charged with issuing demolition permits
(see 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1). The local NYSDOL office is located at: New York State Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health Asbestos Control Bureau 450 S. Salina Street Syracuse,
NY 13202 Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 2 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 1.0 INTRODUCTION B&L was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to
conduct an asbestos inspection of Snell Hall and Olin Hall located on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to determine the presence
and quantity of ACM/PACM prior to EAS Consolidation Project renovations. The work areas consist of approximately 11,000 SF of Snee Hall and approximately 750 SF of Olin Hall. B&L’s
inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) accredited inspectors Michael Goff (Certificate No. 01-07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19-00091).
B&L’s license and the inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C. The inspection was performed on January 8, 2020. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos
Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 3 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 2.0 SCOPE OF WORK The above referenced buildings were surveyed for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing
materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non-friable materials were sampled. Prior asbestos survey investigation data conducted by
Delta in both Snee and Olin Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data from Olin Hall is quite extensive. The inspection was performed in accordance
with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended and adopted March 21, 2007), Section
56-5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling, and Repair. Inspection procedures followed the requirements of the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E - Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA). When suspect ACM
was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be ACM or sampled. The condition of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table 1. The sample location
was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form. Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York State Department
of Health (NYSDOH) Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for analysis. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 4 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS Bulk samples collected at the
building were analyzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street, New York, New York. AmeriSci is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) for Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number 200546-0). AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health
under the Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480). Samples were analyzed by polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized
Light Microscopy Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1). Samples were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample
in the set was analyzed. A material was classified as non-asbestos containing only if each sample in the set was determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%). Non-friable
organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor tiles, mastic and roofing materials, and ceiling tiles/panels containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed
using the NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Non-Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed
that the asbestos content was <1%, the material was considered non-asbestos containing. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 5 - Barton & Loguidice,
D.P.C. 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM The quantities of the homogeneous ACM/PACM identified within the building are summarized on Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous
material code and presents the location, class, description, condition, and quantity of the ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each ACM/PACM found in the building has been
calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The information presented on the form is derived from the sample results and proposed work area floor plans. Table 1 Homogeneous
ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca NY January 8, 2020 Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description Sample ID Condition
Quantity ACM? GLAZE-7 2159 M Grey Window Glaze GLAZE-7-1,2 Good 1 Y TOTAL TBD FLVCT-14 2002 M 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile Good 118 Y 2021 M Good 1997 Y 2022
M FLVCT-14-1,2 Good 814 Y 2034 M Good 24 Y 2149 M Good 538 Y 2152 M Good 754 Y 2160C M Good 227 Y 2161 M Good 309 Y 2161B M Good 143 Y 3021 M Good 1737 Y 3022
M Good 873 Y 3147 M Good 447 Y 3161 M Good 1132 Y 4021 M Good 1771 Y 4022 M Good 874 Y 4154 M Good 1272 Y 4154D M Good 254 Y TOTAL 13,284 SF Snee Hall Limited
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 6 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca NY January
8, 2020 Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM? SINKAAA 2149 M Counter Top Black Mastic Not Sampled Fair 3 PACM
2152 M Fair 3 PACM 3161 M Fair 3 PACM 4154 M Fair 8 PACM TOTAL 17 SF M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal *Additional (GLAZE-7) grey window glaze locations
and quantities will be listed pending further field investigation. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 7 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 5.0 BULK
SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at the building. It lists the material code, material description, sample location, sample ID, and
the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM analyses are presented as appropriate. Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY January
8, 2020 Material Code Material Description Sample Location Sample ID Analytical Results PLM TEM Snee Hall SINK-AAA Counter Top Black Mastic – Delta 8/27/13 report Not Sampled Not Sampled
PACM PACM BBD-1 Brown Cove Base 1134 1134 BBD-1-1 BBD-1-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBDMAS-2 Tan Cove Base Mastic 1134 1134 BBDMAS-2-1 BBDMAS-2-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD GLUE-3 Green/Tan Carpet Glue
1134 1134 GLUE-3-1 GLUE-3-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CAULK-4 White Caulk 1134 1134 CAULK-4-1 CAULK-4-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBD-5 Grey Cove Base 1134 1134 BBD-5-1 BBD-5-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CAULK-6
Black Window Caulk 1134 1134 CAULK-6-1 CAULK-6-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD GLAZE-7 Grey Window Glaze 2159 2159 GLAZE-7-1 GLAZE-7-2 1.6% CH NA NA NA CLLI-8 2’x2’ Smooth Fiberglass Ceiling Panel
2160 2160 CLLI-8-1 CLLI-8-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBD-9 Black Cove Base 2159 2159 BBD-9-1 BBD-9-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD LEVELER-10 Black/Grey Floor Leveler 2159 2159 2159 LEVELER-10-1 LEVELER-10-2
LEVELER-10-3 NAD NAD NAD - - - FLVCT-11 12”x12” Black w/ White Fleck Floor Tile 2162 2162 FLVCT-11-1 FLVCT-11-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD SINK-12 Grey Sink Undercoating 2162 2162 SINK-12-1 SINK-12-2
NAD NAD NAD NAD SEALANT-13 White Pipe Sealant 2162 2162 SEALANT-13-1 SEALANT-13-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 2022 2022 FLVCT-14-1 FLVCT-14-2 <0.25%
CH <0.25% CH 6.0% CH NAD Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 8 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form Cornell University
Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY January 8, 2020 Material Code Material Description Sample Location Sample ID Analytical Results PLM TEM CAULK-15 Grey Door Caulk 2022 2022 CAULK-15-1
CAULK-15-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD MAS-16 Black Mastic – Raised Flooring Stanchions 2161A 2161A MAS-16-1 MAS-16-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD FLVCT-17 Light Grey 2’x2’ Floor Panel 2161A 2161A FLVCT-17-1
FLVCT-17-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD FRSTP-18 Red Firestop Material 3149 3149 FRSTP-18-1 FRSTP-18-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLLI-19 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge Ceiling Panel 4154A 4154A CLLI-19-1 CLLI-19-2
NAD NAD NAD NAD Olin Hall CLLI-20 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge Ceiling Panel 230 230 CLLI-20-1 CLLI-20-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 9 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 6.0 DISCUSSION Of the suspect materials sampled by B&L from Snee Hall, (GLAZE-7) grey window glazing and (FLVCT-14) 12”x12” black w/
grey mottled floor tile are asbestos containing as per laboratory analysis. Black floor tile mastic associated with (FLVCT-14) was determined non-asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black
Trespa countertops are non-asbestos as per Delta’s survey, but (SINK-AAA) associated countertop black mastic is asbestos containing. Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sampling
in Olin Hall. Suspect asbestos materials in the proposed renovation area were determined non-asbestos through Delta’s sampling and subsequent laboratory analysis. One additional suspect
material, not covered by Delta’s report, was sampled by B&L and is non-asbestos as per laboratory analysis. APPENDIX A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data BBD-1-1,2 BBDMAS-2-1,2
GLUE-3-1,2 BBD-5-1,2 CAULK-4-2 CAULK-4-1 CAULK-6-1,2 BBD-9-1,2 CLLI-8-1,2 FLVCT-11-1,2 LEVELER-10-1,2,3 SINK-12-1,2 SEALANT-13-1,2 CAULK-15-1,2 + FLVCT-14-1,2 MAS-16-1,2 FLVCT-17-1,2
+ GLAZE-7-1,2 FRSTP-18-1,2 CLLI-19-1,2 CLLI-20-1,2 Cornell University Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Report Performed at Snee Hall (Building 2049) For the Snee Hall Rooms
4158/4160A/4160B Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II
Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY 14853 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Phone: 607-231-6600
Fax: 607-231-6640 www.delta-eas.com Delta Project No. 2019.003.108 Cornell Work Order No. 11898216 / Task Authorization No. 108 Field work performed by: Michael Drobak, July 31,
2019 Report prepared by: Michael Drobak, August 5, 2019 Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky 2 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... 3 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES
AND METHODS ................. 5 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS ........................................................ 12 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS......................................
........................................... 13 Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM .......................................... 14 Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS
................................................. 15 Appendix C, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS ....... 16 Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS ............................
............................. 17 Appendix E, SURVEY LOCATION / LIMITS & SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWINGS.............. 18 Appendix F, PHOTO LOG .............................................................
....................... 19 3 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com 1.0 INTRODUCTION: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors
(Delta) was contracted by Cornell University to provide a Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A & 4160B at Snee Hall (Bldg. 2049) in support of the
upcoming Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project. The survey addressed all accessible Spaces included in the project renovation areas referenced above and associated suspect building
materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Project. The areas addressed as a part of this Survey were based on the drawings and information provided onsite at the time
of the Survey by Cornell Project Representative Michael Swartwout (reference Attachment E for the Renovation Area Location / Limits Drawing). The initial stage included a review of
past Delta sample information, sample information from other Consultants, and Cornell 4D Database information for the Building. Cornell 4D Database information and bulk sample results
through previous Delta/Cornell Consultant sampling efforts have been incorporated into this Survey and associated Survey Report where applicable. On July 31st, 2019, Delta Certified
Inspector Michael Drobak conducted a walkthrough of the renovation area spaces/rooms to identify the various accessible suspect materials present. Based on a visual inspection of the
affected areas along with a review of the project scope and existing sample information, a total of eight (8) bulk samples were collected representing four (4) separate suspect homogenous
building materials. All eight (8) of the samples collected were non-friable organically bound (NOB) representing four (4) homogenous materials. In addition to the samples collected
above, other suspect homogenous materials with the potential to be impacted by the project were observed but not sampled as they were either addressed through previous sampling efforts
or they were not sampled as they would not be impacted by the scope of work. For the previously sampled materials, the results from the Cornell 4D Database information and previous
Delta/Cornell Consultant Surveys have been incorporated into this report. For those materials that were not sampled based on the scope of work, they are “assumed” asbestos containing
for the purposes of this Survey. The suspect homogenous building materials identified and/or sampled in the affected mass spectrometer installation project renovation areas included
the following: Homogenous Area (HA) Suspect Building Material 01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant 02 Yellow Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base 03 Black Mastic from 12”x12”
Black Mottled Floor Tile 04 Black Trespa Countertop 05* Fume Hood Transite Panels 06** Brown Drywall 07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall 08** White Drywall 09** Joint Compound
from White Drywall 10** White Caulk 11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 4 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com * – Material
confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection ** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database Specific information
required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information” to be included in this pre-renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: Snee
Hall, Building 2049 112 Hollister Drive Cornell University Campus Ithaca, NY 14850 2) Owner’s Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 3) Owner’s
Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 5) Certified Inspectors: Michael Drobak Certificate
No. 02-18996 6) Date of Survey: July 31st, 2019 7) Laboratory: America Science Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell,
NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovati
on Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are
included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j) (2) & (j) (8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k), (5): 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners
are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled-on surfacing materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials
are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos-containing.
The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j) (8) (iii) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)
(8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1910.1001(j)(8)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard,
that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration
pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that
PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001(j) (8) (ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain
asbestos by the following: 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no
ACM is present in the material; or 1910.1001(j) (8) (ii) (B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests
shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector
or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program
such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered
by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1910.1001(j)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may
demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical
techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k) (5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an
employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate
information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all
such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k)
(5) (ii) – An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted
pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 6 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates
that the material is not ACM; or 1926.1101(k) (5) (ii) (B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall
include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by
a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program
such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered
by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101(k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner
may demonstrate that flooring material including associated mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical
techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under “40 CFR Part 61, Subpart
M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos”. Subpart M regulates demolition and/or renovation of “facilities” that may contain asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). “Facilities,”
as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public, industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs
are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos. Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine
which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition
or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category
I and Category II nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS
DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS DOL’s Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective
September 5, 2006). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements” include: 56-5.1
Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner’s agent, except the owner of one
and two-family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using
inspectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have
repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work.
All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 7 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax:
607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (b) Exemptions to Asbestos Survey Requirements: The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following
classes of buildings or structures: (1) An agricultural building; (2) Buildings or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure
certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer, Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction.
(See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure
is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure
is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement
records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her representative. (d) Responsibility to Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey
shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of
this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM,
or asbestos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed
by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review
of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to asbestos, ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair;
and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the
purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted
as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the
requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing
material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the locations, quantities, friability
and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of the building/structure relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos 8 860 Hooper Road
Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com material contained therein. The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only summarizes typical
ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion
of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster; (c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation:
(a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including
but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i)
Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c) Coatings; (d) Non-Metallic or Non-Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite);
(g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (i) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile;
(f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control); (h) Vibration Isolators; (i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (j) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration
Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (l) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation; (n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; 9
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (r) Mastics, Adhesives and Glues; (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper;
(v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or
asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials, an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the
identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and
shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent
analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered
sample analyses, to document nonasbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure
owner’s name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos survey and a copy of the firm’s current asbestos handling license,
the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey,
a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected, and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory
used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure
asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent
to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos
survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre-demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3)
The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any
associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. 10 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (h) Removal Required.
If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work contains ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous
ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner’s agent shall conduct, or cause to have conducted, asbestos removal performed by a
licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted
by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition,
renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner’s agent prior to the completion of the asbestos abatement in accordance with the notification requirements
of this Part. For multi-phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate
portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due
to being structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5. (1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors
on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and
suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but
no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary
asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos.
When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey
per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous
ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with
the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard
EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this
Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis
Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent laboratory approved/accredited by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American 11
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP). Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first category includes non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These
materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring, mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second
category includes non-NOB “friable” materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard. Analysis of all “NOB” materials was initially performed
by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology. If a given sample was reported as non-asbestos following
this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology. Analysis of all “non-NOB” materials was performed by Polarized
Light Microscopy (PLM) following the EPA 600/M4/82/020 and the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodologies. 2.3 Materials not sampled There were several materials present at the site which were
not considered “suspect” by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone, wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components.
12 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS 3.1) Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement
Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non-Asbestos Materials – Based on results from previous Delta Sampling efforts, results from previous sampling efforts of other Consultants,
results from the Cornell 4D Database, and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of accessible suspect materials within the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement
Project Renovation area, the following materials were identified as non-asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA) Non-Asbestos Building Material 01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant 02 Yellow
Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base 03 Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 04 Black Trespa Countertop 06** Brown Drywall 07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall
08** White Drywall 09** Joint Compound from White Drywall 10** White Caulk ** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database 3.2) Snee
Hall Mass Spectrometer Installation Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Asbestos-Containing Materials – Based on results from previous Delta Sampling efforts, results from previous
sampling efforts of other Consultants, results from the Cornell 4D Database, and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of accessible suspect materials within the
Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Renovation area, the following materials were identified as being asbestos-containing: Homogenous Area (HA) Asbestos Containing
Material 05* Fume Hood Transite Panels 11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile * – Material confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection ** – Material
previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database A breakdown of asbestos-containing materials by Homogeneous Area is as follows: A) Fume Hood Transite Panels,
HA 05*: The panels present in the Rooms 4158 and 4160 fume hoods were visually confirmed to be asbestos-containing transite. The total quantity of this material is approximately 40
square feet in each fume hood (two fume hoods total), with the amount of this material to be impacted by the Project being unknown at the time of this survey. 13 860 Hooper
Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com B) 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, HA 11**: The asbestos-containing 12”x12” Black Mottle Pattern Floor
Tile is present in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A, and 4160B. There is approximately 1,650 square feet of this tile present I these rooms, with the actual amount of this material to
be impacted by the Project being unknown at the time of this survey. The mastic associated with this tile (HA 03) was reported as “No Asbestos Detected 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS This
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey was limited to ONLY accessible rooms/spaces included in the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project renovation area. The associated rooms,
spaces and areas which were accessible were inspected and sampled as a part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such as wall cavities, fixed/hard ceiling plenum spaces and enclosed
pipe chases were not included as a part of this Survey. Any suspect materials present in areas not accessible or not included as a part of this Survey shall be assumed ACM when encountered,
until tested. 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper
Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:607.231.6600 Fax:607.231.6640 www.delta-eas.com 2019.003.108 Date(s) Sampling Performed: 07/31/2019 Date of Report: 08/05/2019 Building Code: Material Asbestos
PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2019.003.108 - 01A 01 4 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent to Room 4160. Miscellaneous
ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 01B 01 4 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent to Room 4160. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 02A 02 4 Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl Cove
Base - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 02B 02 4 Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base - Room 4158A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 03A 03 4 Black
Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 03B 03 4 Black Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile - Room 4158A. Miscellaneous
ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 04A 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 04B 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160B. Miscellaneous ND ND ND Task
Authorization No.: TA-108 / Work Order No.: 11898216 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 08 / TEM - 08 Delta Proj. No.: HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected
NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos
by definition Number of Samples Collected: 08 Number Client: Cornell University Asbestos Inspector(s): Michael C. Drobak Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample Laboratory: AmeriSci,
NY Labs HA* Floor Project: Snee Hall 4th Floor Rooms 4158/4160A/4160B Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Asbestos Survey 2049 Cornell University Snee Hall 4th Floor Mass Spectrometer
Exhaust Replacement Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 1 15 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX B Laboratory
Analytical Results 16 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX C Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors
Company and Personnel Certifications New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Delta Engineers & Architects & Land Surveyors, P.C. 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED
DATE OF ISSUE: 09/12/2018 EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/2019 Duly Authorized Representative – Stephen Prislupsky: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions
of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1)
serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving
asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite.
This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work
they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor 17 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:
607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications 18 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX E Survey Location / Limits & Bulk Sample Location Drawings Survey Location / Limits 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600
: Fax: 607.231.6651 www.delta-eas.com Delta Project No.: 2019.003.108 Project Name: Snee Hall 4th Floor Mass Spectrometer Installation Project Work Area: Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A
& 4160B Client: Cornell University Bulk Sample Type: Bldg. No.: 2049 Page: of 1 1 Scale: NTS Drawn By: M. Drobak Date(s) Sampled: 07/31/2019 N 03A 04A 01B 01A 02A 04B 02B 03B 19
860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX F Photo Log 20 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 01: Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant No Asbestos Detected HA 02: Yellow Mastic from non-suspect 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base, No Asbestos
Detected 21 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 03: Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, No Asbestos
Detected HA 04: Black Trespa Countertop, No Asbestos Detected 22 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 05*: Fume
Hood Transite Panels Visually Confirmed to be Asbestos-Containing Transite HA’s 06**, 07**, 08** & 09** - Brown Drywall/ associated Joint Compound & White Drywall/ associated Joint
Compound, All No Asbestos Detected 23 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 10** - White Caulk, No Asbestos Detected
HA 11** - Black Mottled Floor Tile, Asbestos-Containing 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com AN ISO 9001:2008
CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” August 27, 2013 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management
116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Snee Hall Building 2049 - Suspect Asbestos Material Overview Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The following information is associated
with the various “suspect” building materials present at Snee Hall (Building 2049). It should be noted that a comprehensive “Full Building” Asbestos Survey has not been performed at
Snee Hall and other suspect building materials not listed/included below are known to be present in the Building. As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA and NESHAPS,
a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the affected renovation areas and the associated suspect materials present in each. When these “other”
undocumented suspect materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise
by a given project’s Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey. Based on previous Delta sampling efforts and bulk sample information from Cornell University’s 4D Database, the following is a
breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing
wherever present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given material was either sampled as a part of the facility-wide Snee Hall Telecommunications Survey or included
in the Cornell 4D Database, so the material classification is applicable for the given material wherever present in the Building. 1) Asbestos Containing Materials: Counter-Top Black
Mastic 12”x 12” Dark Brown Floor Tile 12”x 12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 2) Non-Asbestos Materials: - White Grout from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall Tile - Mortar from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall
Tile - Brown Drywall - Joint Compound from Brown Drywall - White Caulk - 1’ x 1’ Splined Fissured Ceiling Tile - 1’ x 1’ adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile - Brown Glue Pucks from 1’ x 1’
Adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 2’ Recessed “Line” Patterned Ceiling Tile - White Drywall - Joint Compound from White Drywall DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS,
P.C. Page 2 of 2 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation
Asbestos Survey is required for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the potential to be impacted by the given project’s scope are identified as
ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey must be performed by a New York State Department of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos Inspector and would include a review
of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of bulk samples for those suspect materials encountered that have not been previously identified.
If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C.
Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED
COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” October 7, 2019 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II Cornell University IPP – Facilities
Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Olin Hall Building 2024 – Suspect Asbestos Material Overview Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The
following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Olin Hall (Building 2024). It should be noted that sampling of all suspect exterior building
materials present at Olin Hall has not been performed. When these undocumented suspect exterior building materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing
Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given project’s PreRenovation Asbestos Survey. As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor,
OSHA and NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the affected renovation areas and the associated suspect materials present in each.
Based on Delta’s Full Building Interior Survey and limited exterior building materials asbestos bulk sampling efforts, the following is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials
(ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing wherever present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos
Material, the given material was sampled as a part of the full building interior Asbestos Survey, so the material classification is applicable for the given material wherever present
in the Building. 1) Asbestos Containing Materials: • All Non-Foam / Non-Fiberglass Pipe and Pipe Fitting Insulation • Dark Brown 12" x 12" Floor Tile • White w/ Brown Streaks 12"
x 12" Floor Tile • Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile • Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile • All Colors/Patterns of 9” x 9” Floor Tile • Interior Black Tar Waterproofing
on Brick Walls • Exterior Window Frame Caulk from Original Window System • Exterior Window Glazing Compound from Original Window System • Brown Exterior Door Frame Caulk • Black Glazing
Compound from Door Windows • Black Fire Curtain • Transite Bench-tops / Lab-Tops • Felt Paper from Roofing Vapor Barrier System DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC
Page 2 of 3 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” 2) Non-Asbestos Materials: • White w/Gray Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and
its associated Mastic • White w/Dark Gray Streaks 12" x 12” Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Tan Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Dark Grey Mottled 12"
x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Grey Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Black Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Black Mastic
from all colors / patterns of asbestos containing 9” x 9” Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing Dark Brown 12" x 12" Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing White w/Brown
Streaks 12" x 12" Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile
• Grey Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic • Blue Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic • Light Green w/ Gray Sheet Vinyl Flooring and its associated mastic • Speckled Blue
Sheet Flooring and its associated Paper Backing / Mastic • Grey Epoxy Flooring • All Colors of Carpet Mastics/Adhesives • Raised Floor Panels and associated Yellow Mastic • Raised Floor
Pedestal Mastic • Black Mastic from Quarry Tile Flooring • Mastic from non-suspect vinyl flooring transition strips • All Colors of Floor Levelers • All Colors/Sizes of Cove Base and
their associated Mastics • Grout/Mortar Bed for all Colors/Sizes of Ceramic Wall Tile and Ceramic Floor Tiles • All Colors/Ages of Sheetrock/Gypsum Board • All Colors/Ages of Joint
Compound • Skim-Coat Wall Plasters • All Single-Coat and Two-Coat Wall and Ceiling Plasters • Mastic from non-suspect Wall Fabric • Mastic from Wood Wall Paneling • Mastics/Adhesives
from All Acoustical Wall Panels • Perlite Insulation Board • All Colors/Patterns of Wall Coverings/Wall Paper and their associated Mastics/Adhesives • Yellow Mastic from Wall Cork Board
• Yellow Adhesive from Chalk Boards / Wall-mounted Boards • Spray-on Fireproofing (Confirmed though SOF-V 198.8 Analysis) • All Sizes/Patterns of Suspended Ceiling Tiles • All Patterns
of 12” x 12” Adhered Ceiling Tiles and their associated Mastics/Adhesives • Paper Wrap/Covering/Tape on non-suspect fiberglass pipe insulation • Fiberglass Pipe Insulation End Sealant
• Hot Water Tank Insulation Silver Wrap • White Seam Tape from metal ductwork • All Colors of Duct Seam/Joint Sealant DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of
3 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” 2) Non-Asbestos Materials (continued): • Red Fire Stop • Grey Fire Stop • All Electrical
Conduit Caulks • Window Frame Caulk from Glass Block Windows • Glazing Compound from Glass Block Windows • Frame Caulk from In-Fill Window Panels • All Colors of Interior Door Frame
Caulks • All Door Core Materials • Non-Transite Bench-tops/Lab-tops and associated Adhesives/Mastics/Seam Epoxies • Black Sink Undercoating • Exterior Foundation White Parging • Exterior
Foundation Black Waterproofing • Black Paper Backing from roofing ISO Board • Hot-Mop Tar from Roofing Vapor Barrier System • Lap Sealant from EPDM Roof System Again, as per applicable
State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the potential to be impacted
by the given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey must be performed by a New York State Department of Labor/EPA Certified
Asbestos Inspector and would include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of bulk samples for those suspect materials encountered
that have not been previously identified. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS,
ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services APPENDIX B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain-of-Custody Records APPENDIX
C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building
12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 FILE NUMBER: 99-0130 LICENSE NUMBER: 29267 LICENSE
CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 02/14/2019 EXPIRATION DATE: 02/29/2020 Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable
provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for
a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving
asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite.
This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work
they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor APPENDIX D Laboratory Certificates
www.bartonandloguidice.com Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain‐of‐Custody Records AmeriSci New York 117 EAST
30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 03/22/21 AmeriSci Job # 221033090 03/24/21 ELAP # 11480 1 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell
University Snee Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received Date Examined RE: ofPage P.O. # Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 Attn: John E. Rigge
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLTL-1-1 221033090-01 NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling
Tile1 White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 15.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material:
NoCLTL-1-2 221033090-02 NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile1 White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 19.8% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21
Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-2-1 221033090-03 NAD Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2 Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 46.5%
(by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-2-2 221033090-04 NAD Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2 Brown, Homogeneous,
Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 44.9% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCANVAS-3-1 221033090-05
NAD Corkboard Canvas Cover3 Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 16.1% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci
Job #: 221033090 Page 2 of 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University Snee Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Client Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos Present
Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCANVAS-3-2 221033090-06 NAD Corkboard Canvas Cover3 Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous,
Bulk Material Non-fibrous 15.5% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-4-1 221033090-07 NAD Tan Ceiling
Tile Glue4 Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 25.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material:
NoCLGL-4-2 221033090-08 NAD Tan Ceiling Tile Glue4 Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 32.5% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Reporting Notes: *NAD/NSD
=no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite;
PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable
samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not
consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the
only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94)
National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report
relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________ Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu Date: 3/24/2021 Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis Client Name: 221033090 Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 2289.003.001;
Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University - Snee Hall AmeriSci Job #: Page 1 of 1 Table I Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results Client Sample# Sample Weight (gram) Heat Sensitive
Organic % Acid Soluble Inorganic % Insoluble Non-Asbestos Inorganic % HG Area ** Asbestos % by PLM/DS ** Asbestos % by TEM AmeriSci Sample # 01 CLTL-1-1 1 0.270 13.4 70.9 15.7 NAD NAD
1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation: 02 CLTL-1-2 1 0.217 15.2 65.0 19.8 NAD NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation: 03 CLGL-2-1 2 0.199 50.7 2.8 46.5 NAD NAD
Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: 04 CLGL-2-2 2 0.208 50.7 4.4 44.9 NAD NAD Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: 05 CANVAS-3-1 3 0.082 80.4 3.6 16.1 NAD NAD Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation:
06 CANVAS-3-2 3 0.097 80.0 4.5 15.5 NAD NAD Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation: 07 CLGL-4-1 4 0.264 32.3 41.9 25.7 NAD NAD Tan Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: 08 CLGL-4-2 4 0.361 32.9 34.6 32.5
NAD NAD Tan Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: **Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable
samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples; TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples). Analysis using Hitachi, Model H7000-Noran 7
System, Microscope, Serial #: 747-05-06. NAD = no asbestos detected during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite;
(SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis
results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative
analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID #NY031. Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers
in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of nonuniformly dispersed debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended
(i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials). Analyzed by: John P. Koubiadis Date: 3/25/2021 Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis ffimw qpm effircxx*##mw Client Chiang O'Brien Architects
Location: Cornell University Bulk Sample Ghain-of-Custody 11 Centre Park Suite 203 Rochester, NY 14614 585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5-325-4856 2289.003.001 Date Sampled: 3t19t2A21 1'x1' Fissured
Glued-On Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Glue Tan Ceiling Tile Glue Polarized Light Microscopyl x |a,oo ", orst positive (> than 1olo asbestos) in each sampre series. elru - uoa I r lAdvance
ro TEM if pLM resutt is 1olo asbestos of tess Email: Mike Goff Email: Dave Morse nrg"---]-ot { #221 0 5 5 0 I0 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600
• FAX: (212) 679-3114 03/22/21 AmeriSci Job # 221033091 03/24/21 ELAP # 11480 1 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date
Received Date Examined RE: ofPage P.O. # Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 Attn: John E. Rigge Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA
Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-1-1 221033091-01 NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1 White/Beige, Homogeneous,
Fibrous, Bulk Material Fibrous glass 20%, Non-fibrous 52.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-1-2
221033091-02 NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Fibrous glass 25%, Non-fibrous 43.9% (by NYS ELAP
198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-1 221033091-03 NAD Lab Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious,
Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-2 221033091-04
NAD Lab Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-3 221033091-05 NAD Lab Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP
198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 221033091 Page 2 of 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall PLM
Bulk Asbestos Report Client Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material:
NoCLLI-3-1 221033091-06 NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel3 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 52.3% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21
Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-3-2 221033091-07 NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel3 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 43.3% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-4-1 221033091-08 NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling
Panel4 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 52.4% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material:
NoCLLI-4-2 221033091-09 NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling Panel4 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 49.2% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21
Reporting Notes: *NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material
containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method
198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480);
Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM
is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile,
FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval
of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________ Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu Date: 3/24/2021 Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts Client Name: 221033091 Barton & Loguidice,
D.P.C. 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall AmeriSci Job #: Page 1 of 1 Table I Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results Client Sample# Sample Weight
(gram) Heat Sensitive Organic % Acid Soluble Inorganic % Insoluble Non-Asbestos Inorganic % HG Area ** Asbestos % by PLM/DS ** Asbestos % by TEM AmeriSci Sample # 01 CLLI-1-1 1 0.100
16.3 11.0 72.7 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation: 02 CLLI-1-2 1 0.142 16.1 15.0 68.9 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling
Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation: 03 BENCH-2-1 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 04 BENCH-2-2 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 05 BENCH-2-3 2 ---- ---- ----
---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 06 CLLI-3-1 3 0.163 28.7 19.0 52.3 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation: 07 CLLI-3-2 3 0.085 31.6 25.1 43.3 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long
Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation: 08 CLLI-4-1 4 0.177 25.7 21.9 52.4 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation: 09 CLLI-4-2 4 0.142 28.1 22.7 49.2 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure
Ceiling PanelLocation: **Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH
ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples; TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples). Analysis using Hitachi, Model H600-Noran 7 System, Microscope,
Serial #: 542-26-10. NAD = no asbestos detected during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing
Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present"
or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM Analysis only (no accreditation coverage available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses):
NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID #NY031. Warning Note: PLM limitation, only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter.
TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of nonuniformly dispersed debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e.
soils and other heterogenous materials). Analyzed by: Aleks Barengolts Date: 3/24/2021 Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts ffiBmmgsptr? effimx-x*q#$ce Bulk Sampte Chain-of_Custody 11 Centre
park Suite 203 Rochester, Ny 14614 585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5_325_4856 Project No.: Date Sampled: Samoled bv: 2289.003.001 3t19t2021 MDG/JRC Smooth White Vinyl CovereO Panel M Grey Fleck
BENCH-2-1,2,3 2'x4'Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel Long Fissure Ceiling panet Polarized Light Microscoorfr,o, ", rrst positive (> th,'-, _ * o, p^.; ;""; ;;;:J:#:1'"," *:"":::::,,.
*,.". rmail: Dave Morse Br 72hrs TAT il*tsbartonan.r^^,,;, rqlLr t{: p"s"J.r l_ #221055091 Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates New
York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Barton & Loguidice,
D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 FILE NUMBER: 99-0130 LICENSE NUMBER: 29267 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 01/26/2021 EXPIRATION DATE: 02/28/2022
Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of
the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard
to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for
the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the
licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor.
Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor Appendix D Laboratory Certificates
www.bartonandloguidice.com
self pricing Olin 201/COVID-19 Short Form Contract_MASTER.pdf
1 Rev. 11-2017 Contract No. -- XXX SHORT FORM CONTRACT This Contract made as of the *** day of *** YEAR, by and between CORNELL UNIVERSITY, Ithaca, New York 14853, hereinafter
called "Owner", and ***, hereinafter called "Contractor". WITNESSETH: The Owner and the Contractor mutually agree as follows: 1. SCOPE OF CONTRACT The Contractor agrees to furnish
and provide all the supplies, materials and labor, and to perform to the satisfaction of the Owner all work of every kind required, necessary to, proper for or incidental to the ***
per *** at Cornell University, hereinafter called the "Project", in strict accordance with this Contract, the Proposal, and the Drawings and Specifications, hereinafter collectively
called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents", all of which have been examined by the Contractor and are deemed to be a part of this Contract. at Cornell University, hereinafter called
the "Project", in strict accordance with this Contract, the Proposal, the Drawings and Specifications and the prescribed bonds, hereinafter collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract
Documents", all of which have been examined by the Contractor and are deemed to be a part of this Contract. 2. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor shall complete all the work covered
by the Contract to the satisfaction of Cornell University and in accordance with the Contract Documents by *** unless such period is otherwise extended by the Owner, or be responsible
to the Owner for any damage caused by the failure or omission by the Contractor to comply with this paragraph. 2 Rev. 11-2017 3. PAYMENT 3.1 The Owner shall pay to the Contractor
and the latter shall accept as full and complete payment for the performance of this Contract for the sum of *** ($0.00) which sum is the amount of the contract consideration. If
the progress and performance of the work is satisfactory to the Owner, the latter, upon application submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect, if any, and the Owner,
will make periodic progress payments of the contract consideration to the Contractor, the amount of such progress payments to be based upon the value of the work performed by the Contractor
since the last previous progress payment. 3. PAYMENT 3.1 The Owner shall pay to the Contractor and the latter shall accept as full and complete payment for the performance of this
Contract for the sum of *** ($0.00) which sum is the amount of the contract consideration. The Owner will make a single final payment of the contract consideration to the Contractor
upon completion and acceptance of all work covered by this Agreement. 3.2 Time of Payment. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in this Agreement within thirty (30)
calendar days of approval of submitted invoice. 3.3 All invoices shall be submitted electronically via the e-Builder “Payment Application” process. No paper copies shall be submitted.
3.4 Upon the completion by the Contractor and acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract, the Owner shall make a final payment equal to the amount of the Contract
consideration less all previous payments by the Owner to the Contractor. 3.5 Application for Final Payment shall include a Final Release, and warranty information as required under
the Contract. 3.6 The acceptance by the Contractor, or by anyone claiming by or through the Contractor, the final payment shall constitute and operate as a release to the Owner from
any and all claims of any liability for anything done or furnished for or relating to or arising out of the work covered by the Contract and for any prior act, neglect or default on
the part of the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees in connection therewith. Should the Contractor refuse to accept the final payment as tendered by the Owner or should
they refuse to execute the final application for payment without protest and without reserving any rights or claims against the payment without protest and without reserving any rights
or claims against the Owner, it shall constitute a waiver of any right to interest on the payment so tendered and/or on the amount set forth in said final application for payment.
3 Rev. 11-2017 3.7 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with their Federal Tax Identification Number. 4. CHANGES IN THE WORK 4.1 Cost Events and Change Orders will be managed
by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor shall also upload and
manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. 4.2 The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased or decreased by a change
order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 4.2.1 By agreement with the Contractor. 4.2.2 By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved. This method
shall be used if the Contract contains applicable unit prices. (i) To the extent that a Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for
or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices
shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 4.2.3 By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor,
including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii)
Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively and directly on the Work. 4.2.4 By determining the actual cost
of the extra work in the same manner as in Paragraph 4.2.3, except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. 4.2.5 Regardless of the method used
by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed
breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details, of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format contained on the Owner’s website. 4.3 Mark-ups:
Work performed by the Contractor. Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
4 Rev. 11-2017 5. RISKS ASSUMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 5.1 The Contractor solely assumes all risks, except those risks caused by defects in the drawings or specifications prepared or
furnished by the Owner or the Architect, for loss or damage, occurring prior to the Owner's acceptance of all work, to all or any part of the work covered by the Contract. 5.2 The
Contractor agrees to save harmless the Owner from all losses and damages described above. 5.3 The Contractor's obligations under this section shall not be deemed waived, limited or
discharged by the enumeration in the Contract Documents of the kinds and amounts of insurance that the Contractor is required to and/or does procure. 5.4 Neither the Owner's final
acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of payment therefore shall release the Contractor from their obligations under this section. 6. PUBLIC SAFETY AND RISK
INVOLVING PROPERTY 6.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work, and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State
and Municipal safety laws and building codes as well as regulations of the Owner's Life Safety Services to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises
where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for
the protection of workmen and the public and shall post danger signs warning against the hazards created by the construction. 6.2 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member
of their organization on the work whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. The name and position of any person so designated shall be submitted to the Owner in writing. 6.3
In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Owner, is hereby permitted
to act at their discretion to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and shall so act without appeal if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on
account of emergency work, shall be determined by the Owner. 6.4 The Contractor shall so conduct its operations as not to close or obstruct any portion of any highway, road or other
property until permits therefor have been obtained from the proper authorities. If any of the above are required to be kept open or shall be damaged or rendered unsafe by Contractor's
operations, Contractor shall, at their own expense, make such repairs and provide such temporary detours, guards, bridges, lights and other signals as necessary for public safety and
as will be acceptable to the proper authorities. 5 Rev. 11-2017 6.5 Except as otherwise specifically provided, Contractor shall not do any work that would affect any pipeline, telephone,
or electric transmission line, drainage ditch or channels, or any other structure, nor meter upon the right-of-way or any other lands appurtenant thereto, until notified by the Project
Manager that the Owner has secured permission therefor from the proper authority. Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time or any extra compensation on account of
any postponement, interference or delay caused by any such structure being on or adjacent to the site of the work. 6.6 The Contractor shall preserve and protect all cultivated and
planted areas, and all natural vegetation such as trees, shrubs, and grass on or adjacent to the premises which as determined by the Owner, do not unreasonably interfere with the performance
of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any such property and unauthorized cutting or destroying of trees and vegetation, including damage due to careless operation
of equipment, stockpiling of materials or tracking by equipment or vehicles. 6.7 The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all its work from damage and shall
protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. The Contractor shall make good any such damage, injury or loss. The Contractor shall adequately
protect adjacent property. The Contractor and employees of the Contractor shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems,
and conduct while in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. 7. GUARANTEES
7.1 The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at its own cost and expense any defects in workmanship, materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics
occurring in or to the work covered by the Contract within the (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence
with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract or at such other date or dates as the Owner may specify prior to that time, and the Contractor, upon demand,
shall pay for all damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such other work which may be damaged in removing,
replacing or repairing the said defects. 7.2 Unless such removal, replacement and/or repair shall be performed by the Contractor within ten (10) working days after receipt of written
notice from the Owner specifying such defect, or if such defect is of such a nature that it cannot be completely removed, repaired and/or replaced within said ten (10) day period and
the Contractor shall not have diligently commenced removing, repairing and/or replacing such defect within said ten (10) day period and shall not thereafter with reasonable diligence
and in good faith proceed to do such work, the Owner may employ such other person, firm or corporation as it may choose to perform such removal, replacement and/or repair and the Contractor
agrees, upon demand, to pay to the Owner all amounts which it expends for such work. 6 Rev. 11-2017 8. DEFAULT OF THE CONTRACTOR In the event that the Contractor shall fail to proceed
with the work when and as directed by the Owner or the Architect or if the Contractor in the opinion of the Owner, shall fail to carry on the work with proper speed or if the Contractor
shall otherwise fail to comply with the provisions of this Contract, the Owner, upon fourteen (14) days written notice to the Contractor, may declare the Contractor in default of this
Contract and arrange for the work to be finished in such manner and method as may be deemed advisable by the Owner. If the Owner declares the Contractor in default, the Contractor
shall be liable to the Owner for the cost of all additional architectural and engineering services necessary, in the Owner's opinion, as a result of such default. The Owner shall deduct
from the contract consideration the cost of such additional services and, if the Owner has the work completed by other than the Contractor's surety, the actual cost of completion of
all work covered by the Contract. If the unpaid balance of the contract consideration is insufficient to pay such costs, then the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay the Owner the amount
of such excess costs. 9. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW Each and every provision required by law to be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the Contract
shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein and in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted then, upon the application of either party,
this Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 10. INSURANCE Cornell University requires that contractors submit evidence of adequate insurance
prior to the commencement of performance of work for the University. Minimum requirements are: 10.1 Statutory Worker's Compensation Insurance under the laws of the State of New York
and any other laws that may be applicable thereto. Coverage "B" Employers Liability must have limits of at least $100,000. 10.2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, subject
to limits of $1,000,000 each occurrence, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater. Coverage must be provided for Bodily Injury Liability, Broad Form Property
Damage Liability, Contractual Liability and Products and Completed Operations coverage. Completed Operations coverage is to be maintained for a minimum period of two years after completion
of the Cornell contract. 10.3 Automobile Liability Insurance subject to limits of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence for Bodily Injury and $100,000 each occurrence for property
damage. Such Automobile Liability Insurance shall be for all of contractor's owned, non-owned, and hired automobiles. 10.4 All Risk Property Insurance providing replacement cost coverage
for any property damage to contractor's property which is caused by a loss of any kind and description to any property brought onto Cornell University premises. The contractor agrees
to waive on behalf of itself and its insurance company subrogation against the University for any loss or damage which is covered or should be covered by this insurance. 7 Rev. 11-2017
10.5 All liability policies should be issued on an "occurrence" basis. A CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE for all policies required must be issued to Cornell University and received by the
Office of Facilities Contracts, 121 Humphreys Service Building, Cornell University, Ithaca, New York 14853, prior to any work. 10.6 Cornell University will be added to the contractor's
Comprehensive General Liability Insurance Policy by endorsement as an Additional Insured and evidence of such will be provided in the contractors' certificate of insurance. All policies
must also be endorsed as "primary" for purposes of this contract. 10.7 All certificates of insurance will provide for a minimum of 30 days notice to Cornell University prior to cancellation,
non-renewal or change in policy terms and/or conditions. 11. INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Cornell University and its trustees, officers,
agents, and employees from any claim, action, damage, liability, loss, or expense, including reasonable attorneys' fees, to the extent that they arise out of or result from: • Any
alleged injury or damage to any person, or property, arising out the performance by the Contractor of the work covered by the Contract, including of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct
of the Contractor. • Any injuries or damages sustained by the Contractors' employees in performing the work. 12. NO THIRD PARTY RIGHTS Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create
or give third parties any claims or rights of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner to persons on, about or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed.
13. GENERAL PROVISIONS 13.1 The word or designation "site" as used in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be the area within the Contract Limit Lines, as shown on the drawings,
and all other areas upon which the Contractor is to perform work. 13.2 The word or designation "work" as used in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to be the using, performing,
installing, furnishing and supplying of all materials, equipment, labor and incidentals necessary or convenient to the successful completion of the Project and the carrying out of all
duties and obligations imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract. 13.3 The captions of articles or sections of the Contract Documents are intended for convenience and for reference
purposes only and in no way define, limit or describe the scope or intent thereof, or of this Contract nor in any way affect this Contract. 8 Rev. 11-2017 13.4 The Contract Documents
constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto and no statement, promise, condition, understanding, inducement or representation, oral or written, expressed or implied,
which is not contained herein shall be binding or valid and the Contract Documents shall not be changed, modified or altered in any manner except by an instrument in writing executed
by the parties hereto. 13.5 The Contractor agrees that it will not assign this contract without the prior written consent of the Owner. 13.6 If this contract is funded by New York
State or federal funds, it shall be deemed executory to the extent of state or federal monies being available to Cornell and no liability on account thereof shall be incurred by Cornell
beyond monies available for the purpose thereof. 13.7 The Contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment in the performance of this contract or any subcontract thereunder because of Equal Employment Opportunity protected class status including age, race, disability,
ethnicity, national origin, religion, sex, sexual orientation, marital status, Vietnam Era or special disabled veteran status as applicable under federal, state and local laws. 14.
ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. There are no fees to utilize this system.
Users will be provided a username and password. All correspondence should be communicated through the e-PM system. 15. STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all
executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell
University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants . This includes treating equally
all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and
firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of
gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items
of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct
all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are
expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university personnel. You may file a report to Cornell University on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?c
lientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 9 Rev. 11-2017 16. ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to
keep books and records showing the costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data processing files used by Contractor in analyzing
and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours at Contractor's local office or at Owner's office, if
necessary, and shall be retained by Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed. Each Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection
and audit by Owner, books and records respecting the Work. 17. LIENS Final payment shall not become due and payable until the Contractor delivers to the Owner a complete release or
discharge of all liens arising out of this Contract, or receipts in full in lieu thereof and, in either case, an affidavit that so far as the Contractor has knowledge or information
the releases and receipts include all the labor and materials for which a lien could be filed; but the Contractor may, if any subcontractor refuses to furnish a receipt or release in
full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner, to indemnify him against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner
all monies that the later may be compelled to pay in discharging such a lien, including all costs and a reasonable attorney's fee. No partial or progress payments shall be made to
the Contractor as long as a lien is outstanding on the real property of the Owner by reason of claims arising out of the work of this Contract. 18. TERMINATION The Owner, at any time,
may terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance
of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to
minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually and reasonably incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said
termination, but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total authorized releases to the date of termination. 10 Rev. 11-2017 19. GOVERNING
LAW 19.1 Unless otherwise specified, this Agreement shall be governed by the law of the State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings
relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court, Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which
courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. 19.2 The effective date of this Agreement shall be the date of the Owner's signature. CONTRACTOR’S NAME CORNELL UNIVERSITY
Contractor Owner By: By: Name: Name: Please print Please print Title: Title: Date: Date: 11 Rev. 11-2017 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR *** 1. Qualifications
of Bidders All prospective bidders are hereby notified that, on request of the Owner, they must be able to prove to the satisfaction of the Owner, that they have the skill and experience,
as well as the necessary facilities, ample financial resources, organization and general reliability to do the work to be performed under the provisions of the Contract, in a satisfactory
manner and within the time specified. 2. Storage of Material and Equipment All material shall be stored in a neat, orderly manner. 3. Temporary Power The Contractor shall make arrangements
for necessary temporary electrical power. 4. Construction Water The Contractor shall make arrangements for necessary construction water. 5. Submittals After execution of Contract,
and ordering of material, submit for approval the list of all materials, shop drawings and equipment proposed for use to avoid delay in construction schedule. Intention of using specified
materials does not relieve obligation of submitting this list. 6. Compliance to Document Follow drawings in the laying out of work and inspect locations of existing utilities and
site conditions to be dealt with in the execution of this work. 7. Permits Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution of the
Work and for the use of such Work when completed. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. 12 Rev.
11-2017 8. Environmental Hazardous or Toxic Materials A. Inform officers, employees, agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact
with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith.
B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations.
In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any
parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor
shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus. Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations.
Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site disposal. Disposal of Waste Material and Title A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor
shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal
(TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for disposal of the waste material. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with definitions
associated with the form waste descriptions, can be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resource-files/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf Contractor
must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous
material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and
all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material.
Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control, including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed
of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final
payment(s) under this Contract. 13 Rev. 11-2017 9. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP) The Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, submit a Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP)
for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements as it relates
to the contractor’s scope of work. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety 10. PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES
TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines
from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance
for construction work. Businesses are subject to compliance “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and recommended health and safety practices. 1.0 These Supplemental
Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health
and safety measures for worker safety, the general public, and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document
is to set forth recommended elements and practices to safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses, entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their existing
protocols and practices as necessary to adhere to the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor,
Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of the foregoing elements. 14 Rev. 11-2017
3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread
of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor
shall employ on the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions
(as applicable). 3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures
and practices are in place, not for substantive review or approval. 3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors
and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of
the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best practices for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell
immediately upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors, or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19
contagion. 4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov. 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing
Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf. 4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization)
Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home. 4.4 Centers for Disease Control at https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html. 4.5 Reopening New York at https://www.governor.ny.gov/
sites/governor.ny.gov/files/atoms/files/Con structionShortGuidelines.pdf 15 Rev. 11-2017 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed
to follow any additional project shutdown protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative. 6.0
Contractor expressly agrees to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth
in applicable and then current Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to
engage in any on-site construction activity. 11. Changes Within the Scope of the Work The Contractor shall, with the written approval of the Owner's representative, and without
extra charge, make reasonable modifications in layout needed to prevent conflict with existing conditions for proper execution of this work. 12. Clean Up Contractor shall, at all
times during the progress of the work, keep the site and adjacent roads and sidewalks free from accumulation of waste matter, dirt and rubbish. At the completion of the work, all excess
materials, earth, etc., shall be removed from the site. 13. Supervision Contractor shall supply services of an experienced and competent supervisor who shall be constantly in charge
of work at the site. 14. Representative of Cornell The University will assign a representative of the Owner. Only directives from Cornell University’s designated representative (NAME
OF REPRESENTATIVE) shall be recognized by the Contractor. 15. Construction Trades All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction of one of the local unions as
covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union labor. 16 Rev. 11-2017 16.
New York State Prevailing Wage Rates The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The
Contractor shall comply with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. (a) All labor for this project shall
be paid in accordance with the New York State Department of Labor Prevailing Rate Case No. __________ dated __________. (b) The Contractor shall post the appropriate prevailing wage
schedules in a conspicuous place at the construction site. (c) The Contractor is required to submit certified copies of its payrolls with each invoice. The Contractor is responsible
for obtaining all updates, corrections and future copies of the annual determination which are available at the Department of Labor website (www.labor.state.ny.us). 17. Bid Documents
o Specifications for ***, General Requirements and Technical Specifications, dated ***, as prepared by ***; o Drawings No. *** *** dated *** as prepared by *** o
Addendum No. 1 dated ***. 18. Davis Bacon Act Labor Requirements The Contractor shall comply with Davis Bacon Act, as amended (40 USC 276a to a-7). See attached requirements. 19.
Buy American The Buy American clause of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA) requires, unless an exception applies, that all of the iron, steel, and manufactured
goods used in the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of a public building or public works project are produced in the United States. For manufactured goods, the Act requires
"substantial transformation" of a product in the United States from component parts. A product will satisfy the qualifications of the clause if all of the components of the manufactured
good are manufactured in the United States or all of the components were assembled into the final product in the United States. FINAL RELEASE FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND
RELEASE OF RIGHTS Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount Previously Paid State
Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials, etc., furnished by the below
named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums previously received, and the
payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all claims and liens and rights
of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the Owner or from any
other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore furnished by the below named
Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: The undersigned further represents and warrants
that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which he/she is signing; that it has
properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully and completely; that it has
paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices, retentions, holdbacks, expenses
employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final payment application; and that any
materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for and supplied on the last and final
payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including without limitation reasonable
attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers, material person or subcontractors.
In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes any and all claims, rights
or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto. The below named Contractor
or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract with respect to this guarantee
will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name Day of 20 By: Title:
self pricing Olin 201/Olin 201 - CD Combined.pdf C:\Users\lisa.CHOBR\Dropbox (Chiang O'Brien)\CU - Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 and Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations\Snee & Olin
1 1 1 3 1 1 7 8 3 7 3 4 9 3 8 5 5 3 8 5 5 4 3 7 8 5 5 5 5 5 9 3 9 7 3 8 2 5 3 5 3 0 0 5 2 2 1 5 3 2 4 5 8 4 0 5 0 7 2 5 1 5 1 6 5 0 5 2 9 1 2 4 9 3 1 9 3 2 0 3 1 8 3 1 8 3 1 7 3 2 0
3 2 0 2 4 1 7 1 3 1 4 1 4 1 6 1 6 2 7 5 4 9 8 1 1 2 0 2 6 2 6 1 0 7 1 0 7 7 5 2 8 2 8 2 7 6 6 1 9 1 0 1 3 4 2 3 6 7 1 6 5 2 6 3 9 5 6 5 6 7 4 3 9 9 4 4 5 4 2 2 8 7 4 0 0 1 6 6 1 6 9
1 1 9 2 1 2 0 0 C C 2 0 0 S C 2 0 0 E A 2 0 1 A 2 0 1 B 2 0 2 2 0 4 2 0 3 2 0 5 2 0 6 2 0 8 2 0 7 2 0 9 2 1 0 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 5 2 1 4 2 1 6 2 1 8 2 2 2 2 3 0 2 2 8 2 2 4 2 3 2 2 4 4
2 4 6 2 4 8 2 5 0 2 5 2 2 5 4 2 5 6 2 6 7 2 5 5 2 5 5 B 2 0 0 S B 2 0 0 E B 2 0 0 T A 2 0 0 U C 2 0 0 J C 2 0 0 J B 2 0 0 T B 2 2 6 2 4 5 2 0 0 U A 2 0 0 U B 2 0 0 S A 2 0 0 C A 2 0
0 C B 2 5 5 A 2 0 0 S D 2 0 0 S E 2 3 0 A 2 3 0 B 2 0 0 U R 2 0 6 A 2 6 9 2 0 0 T C 2 5 8 2 6 0 A 2 6 0 2 7 6 2 7 6 D 2 7 6 C 2 7 6 B 2 7 6 A 2 0 0 J A U P U P D N U P U P D N U P D
N 101 ROOM NAME 1 A101 SIM 1 A101 SIM A101 1 SIM 1'-0" B1 W1 F1 101 ROOM NAME Name Elevation W1 A101 1 SIM DETAIL ENLARGEMENT WALL SECTION BUILDING SECTION DETAIL SECTION1 INTERIOR
ELEVATION DOOR & INTERIOR WINDOW TAG WALL TAG ROOM IDENTIFICATION EXTERIOR WINDOW & LOUVER TAG ROOM FINISH KEY CONTRACT LIMIT LINE EXISTING DOOR NEW DOOR PARTITIONS, DOORS AND ITEMS
TO BE REMOVED FULL HEIGHT PARTITION PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION NOTE KEY FLOOR ELEVATION 100 100 1 REVISION CLOUD & TAG PLAN ELEVATION 50' -6" SITE ELEVATION STRUCTURAL ELEVATION WORKING
POINT WP CEILING HEIGHT EQUIPMENT TAG A101 SIM A1 A2 A3 A4 1 1i SCOPE LINE DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FRAMING AT NEW CONSTRUCTION, TYP. DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH AT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH 50 ' 6" 50'-6" 1 EXISTING PARTITION ROOM 201 SET NUMBER ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND PATTERNSPROJECT INFORMATION Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850 607.241.0244 G001 4/23/2021 11614/COB# 2013 6-44 HO PLAZA Olin Hall 201 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CORNELL UNIVERSITY GENERAL G001COVER SHEET ARCHITECTURAL A101OLIN
201 OTHER DISCIPLINES MEP 101MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING PLANS DATE: JOB NUMBER: CONSTRUCTION CLASSIFICATION: SPRINKLER PROTECTION: BUILDING USE CLASSIFICATION: TOTAL EXISTING
BUILDING AREA: AREA OF RENOVATION: AREA OF ADDITION: TOTAL AREA OF PROJECT: F|S Engineering, DPC 721 East Genesee Street, Syracuse, NY 13210.1505 315.471.4013 1-A
SP B 129,897 SF 361 SF 0 SF 361 SF 1/32" = 1'-0" 1 SECOND FLOOR -WORK AREA LOCATION PLAN 201A 201B UP D1 EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN EXISTING BENCH & SINK TO REMAIN B1 P1 F1 201 MIN.1'-0"
MIN1'-0" ROUGHING PUMP (ON LOWER SHELF OF TABLE) EXISTING TABLE FOR MASS SPECTROMETER LC SYSTEM -TOP OF BENCH COMPUTER STATION BATTERY BACKUP GAS GENERATOR -UNDER EXISTING BENCH MASS
SPECTROMETER EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL, TYP CONTRACT LIMIT LINE FINISH KEY: WALL P1PAINT COLOR 1 -LINEN WHITE FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED P1 UNLESS OTHERWISE
NOTED. FLOOR F1 EXISTING TO REMAIN B1 EXISTING TO REMAIN DEMOLITION NOTES: CEILINGS: REMOVE AND SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION CEILING AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT TO ALLOW FOR THE WORK
TO BE COMPETED. D1. REMOVE EXISTING WALL CABINET, TURN OVER TO OWNER. PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONDITION. D2. REMOVE ABANDONED CONNECTIONS,
PIPING, CONDUIT, ALSO SEE DRAWING MEP 101, TYP. PATCH AS NEEDED WALL AS REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONDITION. GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE EXISTING PHOTOS FOR ADDITIONAL
SCOPE INFORMATION, TYPICAL 2. PATCH ALL DAMAGED WALL SURFACES WITHIN ROOM 201, TO MATCH EXISTING, TYPICAL 3. ALL EXISTING CABINETS, EQUIPMENT, AND FURNITURE TO BE PROTECTED DURING
CONSTRUCTION, TYPICAL. 4. RELOCATE MASS SPECTROMETER FROM OLIN ROOM B01, COORDINATE MOVE TIMING AND DETAILS WITH OWNER. 5. ALL EQUIPMENT IN ROOMS 201, 201A, AND 201B TO REMAIN IN USE
BY THE OWNER DURING CONSTRUCTION. ANY INTERRUPTION TO POWER, DATA, OR ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER AT LEAST TWO WEEKS IN ADVANCE OF ANY INTERRUPTION.
6. REFER TO "SCIEX X500 QTOF SYSTEM -SITE PLANNING GUIDE" EXCERPTSON THIS SHEET ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ALL MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE FOLLOWED. 7. REINSTALL CEILING, GRID, AND
CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT TO MATCH PRERENOVATION CONDITIONS. DAMAGED CEILING PANELS TO BE REPLACED WITH MATCHING PANELS FURNISHED BY OWNER. 8. AT LOCATIONS WHERE OPENINGS ARE MADE
IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OF MEP WORK, RESTORE TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 1/4" = 1'-0" A6 PARTIAL PLAN 201
WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing
the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration,
and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A101 OLIN 201 4/23/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall 201 PARTIAL “SCIEX X500 QTOF SYSTEM –SITE PLANNING GUIDE”PROVIDED FOR REFERENCE ONLY: EXISTING CONDITIONS -OLIN 201 SOUTH-EAST CORNER EXISTING CONDITIONS
-OLIN B01 NORTH-EAST CORNEREAST WALL NORTH-EAST WALL AND CEILING WEST WALL LC AND COMPUTER STATIONGAS GENERATORBATTERY BACKUPMASS SPECTROMETER -BACK ROUGHING PUMP EXISTING SET UP D2
D1 D1 WEST WALL 178 361 49 165 200CC 200SC 201A 201B 201 DN UP 178 361 49 165 200SC 201A 201B 201 DN UP 178 361 49 201A 201B 201 DN UP VD CONNECT TO EXST. 12" DIA S.S. EXH. RISER 8"
8" DIA DUCT DN TO 12" AFF W/ BIRDSCREEN. PROVIDE KF HOSE ADAPTER AND CLAMP ON SIDE SIZED AS NEEDED TO CONNECT MASS SPEC VENT HOSES TO DUCT. COORDINATE W/ MASS SPEC LOCATION AND VENT
HOSE LENGTH AS WELL AS FUTURE LOCATION OF AC UNIT. MAINTAIN CLEAR WORK SPACE AS REQUIRED. BALANCE EXST. SA TU TO 950 CFM. BALANCE EXST. EA RA TU TO 850 CFM. BALANCE EXST. EF-14 LAB
EXHAUST FAN IN PENTHOUSE AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMODATE NEW RM 201 EXHAUST. EXISTING FAN IS BELIEVED TO BE BALANCED TO 1450 CFM. BALANCE FAN UP TO 1700 CFM AND BALANCE NEW 8" DIA DUCT IN
RM 201 TO 250 CFM. BALANCE SA DIFFUSER TO 440 CFM. BALANCE SA DIFFUSER TO 75 CFM. BALANCE EA GRILLE TO 850 CFM. EXISTING FLOOR DRAIN TO REMAIN CA (E) 1/2" CA 1/2" CA CONNECT 1/2"CA
TO EXISTING 1/2"CA DROP TO 3'-0" AFF. PROVIDE VALVE, FILTER, REGULATOR & QUICK CONNECT. PLUMBING SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SYMBOLDESCRIPTION (ABBREVIATION) COMPRESSED AIR PIPING CA
PIPE DROP PIPE RISE 12 4 3 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES: DISCONNECT AND EXTEND EXISTING 120/208V EMERGENCY POWER CIRCUIT FROM ROOM B01 TO ROOM 201. CIRCUIT IS FED FROM 50A/2P CIRCUIT BREAKER
TO PANEL LEPP-B. RELOCATE EXISTING UPS RECETACLE FROM ROOM B01 TO ROOM 201 COORDINATE PREFERRED LOCATION IN ROOM 201. CLEAN EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURES. EXISTING CONDUIT AND RECEPTACLE
TO BE REMOVED . REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING AND RACEWAY BACK TO SOURCE.CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT QANTITIES IN THE FIELD. EXISTING DATA OUTLETS TO REMAIN 1 2 3 4 FS ENGINEERING,
DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction
of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and
the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D
E F 12345678910 12345678910 MEP101 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS 4/23/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall 201 3" SCALE: 1/4" =
1'-0" MEP101 1201 PLAN -HVAC ALTERATION 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" MEP101 D2201 PLAN -PLUMBING ALTERATION 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" MEP101 2201 PLAN -ELECTRICAL ALTERATION NOTES: 1) PROVIDE
PRE-BALANCE REPORT FOR ALL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS AFFECTED BY WORK AND NOTED TO BE BALANCED.